SINUMERIK 840C SIMODRIVE 611-D Installation Guide 09.
SINUMERIK 840C SIMODRIVE 611-D Installation Instructions Installation Guide SINUMERIK 840C/CE Control Standard/Export Version SIMODRIVE 611-D Drive Software Version Software Version 1.x 2.x 3.x 4.x 5.x 6.x 1.x 2.x 3.x 4.x 09.
SINUMERIK® documentation Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the ”Remarks” column. Status code in ”Remarks” column: A . . . New documentation. B . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No. C . . . Revised edition with new status. If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page. Edition Order No. Remarks 11.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1 General Reset and Standard Start-up 2 PLC Installation 3 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 Machine Data Dialog (MDD - as from SW 3) 5 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9 Axis and Spindle Installation 10 Data Backup/CPU Replacement 11 Functional Descriptions 12 Index 13
Contents 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection ...................... 1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.2.9 1.2.10 1.2.11 1.2.12 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.6 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information on module handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 General notes/Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplified switchover between languages (as from SW 5) . . . . . . . . . Printing screen hardcopies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of the Diagnosis area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 NC Service . . .
5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 PLC configuration and PLC machine data (as from SW 3) . . . . . . . . PLC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18 5–18 5–20 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 Drive configuration and drive machine data (as from SW 3) ....... Drive configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.6 6.7 6.7.1 6.8 6.9 6.9.1 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.12.1 6.13 Channel-specific MD bits 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDs for multi-channel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDs for parameter set switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 9.3.1 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.3.1 9.5.3.2 9.5.4 9.5.4.1 9.5.4.2 9.5.4.3 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 Function generator (axis and spindle - as from SW 3) ........... Function generator (axis and spindle) - signal parameters (as from SW 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional information (notes) on measurement and signal parameters (as from SW 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal waveforms of function generator (SW 3) . . . . . . .
10.5 10.5.1 10.5.2 10.5.3 10.5.3.1 10.5.3.2 10.5.3.3 10.5.3.4 10.5.3.5 10.5.3.6 10.5.4 10.5.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-loop control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oscillation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 12.6.1 12.6.2 12.6.3 12.6.3.1 12.6.4 12.6.5 12.6.6 12.6.7 Coordinate transformation 6FC5 150-0AD04-0AA0 . . . . . . . . . . . Corresponding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The transformation data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of machine data for coordinate transformation . . . . . . . . . . Transformation parameters . . . . .
12.10 12.10.1 12.10.2 12.10.2.1 FIFO/predecoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid block change using FIFO function (up to SW 2 only) . . . . . . . . Control of predecoding (SW 5 and higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corresponding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–71 12–71 12–73 12–73 12.11 12.11.1 12.11.1.1 12.11.1.2 12.11.1.3 12.11.1.4 12.11.1.5 12.11.1.6 Absolute encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.15 12.15.1 12.15.2 12.15.3 12.15.4 Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 (SW 2 and higher) . . . . . . . Corresponding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feed axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring circuit monitoring and alarm processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . C axes to spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–116 12–116 12–116 12–117 12–117 12.16 12.16.1 12.
12.18.13 12.18.13.1 12.18.13.2 12.18.14 12.18.14.1 12.18.14.2 12.18.15 12.18.15.1 12.18.16 12.18.16.1 12.18.16.2 12.18.16.3 12.19 12.19.1 12.19.2 12.19.3 12.19.4 12.19.4.1 12.19.4.2 12.19.4.3 12.19.4.4 12.19.5 12.19.5.1 12.19.5.2 12.19.5.3 12.19.5.4 12.19.5.5 12.19.5.6 12.19.5.7 12.19.5.8 12.19.5.9 12.19.5.10 12.20 12.20.1 12.20.2 12.20.3 12.20.4 12.20.4.1 12.20.4.2 12.20.4.3 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief start-up of a GI grouping .
12.20.4.4 12.20.5 12.20.5.1 12.20.5.2 12.20.5.3 12.20.5.4 12.20.6 12.20.6.1 12.20.6.2 12.20.7 12.20.7.1 12.20.7.2 12.20.8 12.20.8.1 12.20.8.2 12.21 12.21.1 DC link undervoltage monitoring in 611D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit . . DC link buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring for generator minimum speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications/control failure . .
12.26 BERO interface (SW 4 and higher) 12.27 12.27.1 Parameter set switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter set switchover (up to SW 3) ..................... Axis parameter sets (NCK/SERVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle parameter sets (NCK/SERVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FDD parameter sets (611D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSD parameter sets (611D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.32.14 12.32.15 12.32.15.1 12.32.15.2 12.32.15.3 12.33 12.33.1 12.33.1.1 12.33.1.2 12.33.1.3 12.33.2 12.33.2.1 12.33.2.2 12.33.2.3 Example on a double-slide turning machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collision monitoring (as from SW 6.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additive protection zone adjustment via setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collision monitoring without reduction zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.92 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.1 Prerequisites 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.1 Prerequisites The following prerequisites must be fulfilled prior to initial start-up: • Electrical and mechanical installation of the machine must have been completed and the axes prepared for operation. The following points must be confirmed by the customer! • Customer PLC program operational and pretested. • Measuring system installed and wired as far as SINUMERIK.
aa a a a a a a a a a aaa a a a a a aa a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
06.93 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.2.1 Information on module handling Additional instructions: • • • Do not open the special packaging unnecessarily. Do not bring into contact with synthetic materials (possibility of static charging). Disconnect the power supply prior to insertion and removal. 1.2.2 Grounding system Proper grounding to divert external interference is vital to trouble-free operation. It must be ensured that the ground wires are not looped and have the required cross section.
1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.2.5 Cables 1.2.5 06.93 Cables Check all cables in accordance with the cable and equipment overview (refer to Interface Description, Part 2). This applies particularly to cables made up by the customer. A random check should be made on at least one connector. Particular attention should be paid to elastomeric connections. In the event of failure to comply with our guidelines, the relevant dealer must be notified and any necessary corrective measures instigated. 1.
06.93 1.2.10 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.2.10 Jumpering Jumpering The jumper configurations on the modules required at the time of installation and start-up is discussed in Part 2 of the Interface Description. 1.2.11 Position control, input and measuring system resolution In SINUMERIK, position control resolution and input resolution can be entered separately.
1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.3 Standard/Export version 1.3 10.94 Standard/Export version Export regulations Due to the fact that the German export list requires approval for certain control functions, two versions of the SINUMERIK 840C can be configured. The Standard Version (840C) is allowed to include the whole scope of functions of the control and is therefore subject to export approval concerning its type.
aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
10.94 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.5.1 Self-test and system start-up 1.5 Voltage and functional tests 1.5.1 Self-test and system start-up NC area The checksum of the system program memory is generated whenever the control is switched on (Power On routines) and during cyclic operation. The control flags discrepancies between reference and actual checksum in different ways. The NC CPU flashes continuously (red LED) and goes into the stop state.
1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.5.1 Self-test and system start-up 03.95 File system check (SOFTWARE 4.4 and higher) Messages during the file system check: The previous message Checking file system COMPLETE is replaced by the following: • During the file system check: Verifying file system: Pass 1 Verifying file system: Pass 2 Verifying file system: Pass 3 • COMPLETE COMPLETE COMPLETE If the WOP work file has to be recreated, the following message also appears: Creating WOP working file ...
10.94 1.6 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.1 First installation and start-up of control (as from SW 3) 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up As from software version 3, machine data dialog is used for the standard start-up. For further details, refer to Machine Data Dialog (MDD) Section. 2.1 First installation and start-up of control (as from SW 3) Hardware The central units of the SINUMERIK 840C are designed in a modular way.
09.95 08.96 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.2 Standard installation and start-up as flowchart (as from SW 3) 2.2 Standard installation and start-up as flowchart (as from SW 3) Default values can be used for data in general reset mode during initial installation or after a loss of data caused by, for example, removal of a module, hardware defect of a module or empty back-up battery in the case of power failure.
09.95 08.96 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.2 Standard installation and start-up as flowchart (as from SW 3) 2.3 Select general reset mode (as from SW 3) START NC-ON Communication to NCK No Yes Yes General reset mode display – Start-up switch on CSB in position “Start-up” (1) No – NC ON/OFF Operating area DIAGNOSIS Operating area DIAGNOSIS Operating area DIAGNOSIS Password entry possible No Yes Start-up softkey GENERAL RESET MODE softkey Fig. 2.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.4 General reset (as from SW 3) 2.4 General reset (as from SW 3) Fig. 2.1 The DIAGNOSIS, START-UP and GENERAL RESET MODE softkeys are used for selecting the GENERAL RESET MODE basic display. Functions in GENERAL RESET MODE FORCEDBOOT NCK-PLC Required only for changing operating system of NC and PLC. This softkey initiates an identifier for NCK and PLC which results in subsequent booting.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.4 General reset (as from SW 3) DRIVE GEN. RESET The configuration file for digital drives is deleted on the hard disk. This function has no effect on analog drives. Caution! Pressing the DRIVE GEN. RESET softkey deletes the contents of the BOOT FILE in the standard data. Any existing DAC parameterization boot files (see Section 5) are also deleted. SAVE PLC The user program currently in the PLC is copied onto the hard disk as ANW_PROG file.
04.96 09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.5 Memory configuration (as from SW 3) 2.5 Memory configuration (as from SW 3) Standard values for DRAM Softw. 3 Softw. 4 4 MB DRAM Softw. 4 8 MB DRAM 1 MB Part prog. 704 kB Part prog. 704 kB Part prog. 512 kB UMS 256 kB UMS 256 kB UMS 256 kB IKA 16 000 points 64 kB IKA 4 000 points 64 kB IKA 4 000 points 240 kB Block buffer 240 kB Block buffer 0 kB Meas. value mem. 0 kB Meas. value mem. 0 kB FDD/MSD 0 kB FDD/MSD 2 MB free (SW 4.1–4.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.5 Memory configuration (as from SW 3) Setting ranges for SRAM Default values Setting ranges Tool offsets 32 kB 0 to 1 638 tools 0 to 64 kB R parameters 19 kB Channel: 0 to 700 parameters Central: 700 to 9 999 parameters 0 to 64 kB Free 13 kB 64 kB are available for tool offsets and R parameters. Caution: The memory must be reformatted after every change. SK “NCK AWS format.” In general reset mode.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.6 Loading machine data (as from SW 3) 2.6 Loading machine data (as from SW 3) Note Loading the machine data function takes several seconds and is accompanied by the flashing message “Wait”. Selection The following softkeys must be pressed: Diagnosis, Startup, Machine data, File functions: Fig. 2.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.6 Loading machine data (as from SW 3) error messages that occur during the Load from disk function. On ending general reset mode, load the drive data (under file functions drive configuration) or the complete file (under file functions machine configuration) again. Info key You can obtain a summary of the procedure described above in the General reset mode display if you press the Info key.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.7 Deselect general reset mode 2.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.8 Standard installation short version (up to SW 2) 2.8 Standard installation short version (up to SW 2) As from software version 3, machine data dialog is used for standard installation and start-up. See Machine Data Dialog Section (MDD). Operation The following sequence must be followed for standard SINUMERIK 840C installation and start-up: 1.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.8 Standard installation short version (up to SW 2) When the softkeys, DIAGNOSIS, NC DIAGNOSIS, NC START-UP and ENTER PASSWORD have been pressed, the following display appears: MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM. SERVICES DIAGNOSIS 16:38 JOG M. No. :1 Chann :1 PROGRAM RESET NC alarms Enter password NC MA. DAT **** PLC MA. DAT. CYCLE MA. DAT. ENTER PASSWORD LOCK PASSWORD GENERAL RESET MODE Fig. 2.3 The password for the NCK area is set in machine data 11.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.9 General reset (up to SW 2) 2.9 General reset (up to SW 2) MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM. SERVICES DIAGNOSIS 16:38 JOG M. No.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.9 General reset (up to SW 2) DELETE CYCLES MD “DELETE CYCLES-MD”: The cycle setting data and MIB parameters are deleted and formatted. The MIB parameters are the machine input buffers for the standard cycles during program support. Activating the RECALL key calls the general reset screenform. INITIAL. MEMORY FORMAT USER DATA “INITIALIZE MEMORY”: The Initialize NC memory screenform is called.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.10 Standard installation and start-up as flowchart (up to SW 2 only) 2.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.11 Enter PLC machine data (up to SW 2 only) 2.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.12 Enter NC machine data (up to SW 2 only) 2.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.13 Axis installation (simplified, up to SW 2 only) 2.13 Axis installation (simplified, up to SW 2 only) START JOG mode Axis traversing movement (direction key) Check of PLC program Check the enables Yes Feed hold? No Feed enable? Yes No Alarm? Yes Position control direction OK? (s. Sect.
09.95 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.14 Spindle installation (Example: one spindle, up to SW 2 only) 2.14 Spindle installation (Example: one spindle, up to SW 2 only) START 1st spindle available? No 1 Yes No Spindle pulse encoder available? No Yes Spindle rotating? Yes Spindle pulse encoder with 1024 pulses? Yes No No Change bit 1 of NC MD 521* Analog spindle speed? Yes With 840 M: Buy option Correct dir. of rotation? Yes Enter channel no. in DB31 DL2 Enter spindle no.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.1 General remarks 3 PLC Installation 3.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.1 General remarks PG interface Only the following values are permissible for the PG interface on the PLC 135 WD: 9600 BAUD PARITY EVEN 2 STOP BITS The PG interface is always active. PG operation Step 3.2 Activity 1 Connect cable NC-PG 2 PG 7xx Start S5-DOS 3 PG 7xx Select on-line mode PG function via MMC The function exists on SW 4 and higher and can be obtained as an option. It is mainly for servicing, testing and commissioning.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.2 PG function via MMC When the PG software is selected, the 1st serial interface is disabled. It is only enabled again when the PG mode is terminated. Caution With the PG software, it is possible to select other files as well (not S5 files) to delete or copy them etc. with the function: object\DOS file\. The user is responsible for using this function. System files can be deleted too.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.2 PG function via MMC Delete character Backspace not possible 1) Shift + not possible 1) . DEL . DEL . DEL Shift + 0 INS Shift + Delete char. to the left .
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.2 PG function via MMC Restrictions S The data management function BTRIEVE is not installed. S For output on the printer via the parallel interface parallel 1 (Centronics, X122) on the MMC-CPU, LPT1 must be set in the printer parameters. S The following characters cannot be displayed on the operator panel: “#”, “{”, “ }”, “~”, “’”, “$”, “&”, “ |”, “\” S Data exchange with external PGs can only be performed with the FD-E2 diskette unit. 3.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.4 Procedure for starting up the PLC Save/load PLC 135 WD MMC Disk PLC save S-RAM user program memory X111 1) X151 S-RAM user data memory PG 7xx save/load Step 5 program Procedure up to SW 2 Directory PLC/program file ANW_PROG Save/load to external in PC format e.g. PCIN 3.X PCIN 4.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.4 Procedure for starting up the PLC Procedure as from SW 3 PLC 135 WB2 with RESTART EPROM submodule and PLC 135 WD Prerequisites: The PLC user program should exist either on diskette or on the hard disk, the RAM of the PLC CPU is empty. Step Note Description 1 The Restart EPROM submodule must be plugged in the X231 submodule slot (PLC 135 WB2 only). 2 Connect PG7xx to the control and load the STEP5 program. 3 Select General reset mode on the control.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.5 PLC diagnostics 3.5 PLC diagnostics The following diagnostics displays exist: Displayed by 3.5.1 Brief description 1 LED CPU hardware fault 2 – System initialization program 3 USTACK detailed error coding Displays programming errors 4 PLC status 5 Timeout Displays and changes (password) to PLC data (I, O, F, D, T, C) Timeout analysis of write access LED display After switching on the mains voltage, the interface control runs a self-diagnostics program.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.5.2 System initialization program 3.5.2 System initialization program After the self diagnostics program has been run through, the system initialization program is requested. In its first section, the data required for running the organization program are set up.
09.95 08.96 3 PLC Installation 3.5.3 USTACK, detailed error coding 3.5.3 USTACK, detailed error coding The operating system can detect malfunctioning of the central processor, errors in the system program or effects of incorrect programming by the user. If the interpreter comes across an error during command processing or if another error occurs that cause a program interruption, the PLC enters the STOP loop.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.5.4 PLC status 3.5.4 PLC status In the “PLC STATUS” mode, the user can read out the contents of counters and timers and read out and write input words, output words, flag words, data words and data double words. These words can only be written when a password has been entered.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.5.
09.95 3 PLC Installation 3.5.5 Timeout analysis 3.5.5 Timeout analysis A write access to the communication or local bus is executed by the bus interface. The processor immediately receives an acknowledgement and continues. (Buffered access to communication/local bus). If a timeout occurs during such an access, the current state of the registers of the processor and coprocessor give no information as to the cause of the timeout.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1 General notes/overviews 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1 General notes/overviews 4.1.1 Password A password protects data against unauthorized access. The MMC and NCK areas are password-protected. Selection of the password in the MMC area from SW 3 Diagnosis up to SW 2 Diagnosis Start-up Password Password The password for the MMC area is defined with MD11 in the NCK area. Every additional value in MD11 must be 4 digits long.
4 09.95 04.96 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1.2 Simplified switchover between languages (as from SW 5) 4.1.2 Simplified switchover between languages (as from SW 5) In the Diagnosis area it is possible to changed the language of the input screens that appear subsequently. This is done with the softkey “Language/Sprache” in the initial display of the Diagnosis area. Fig. 4.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1.3 Printing screen hardcopies 4.1.3 Printing screen hardcopies The screen hardcopies are stored in a compressed TIFF or PCX format to reduce the transmission times via the RS 232 interface. The format is selected in two Bedconf entries. The formats can be interpreted with Windows tools, such as Word.
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1.3 Printing screen hardcopies 4.1.4 Selection of the Diagnosis area Diagnosis Select the DIAGNOSIS area with this softkey in the area menu bar. The initial display that appears shows you the alarms currently pending. With the vertical softkey bar it is possible to switch to the display of the current messages. Fig. 4.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1.4 Selection of the diagnosis area Service display Start-up A Fig. 4.3 Alarm log 1 Default setting: All alarms and messages are included. Alarm log 2 Default setting: All reset and power ON alarms are included. Note: Both files are configured in the CONFIG file. Fig. 4.
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1.4 Selection of the diagnosis area Display NCK software version NC info For description see NC service in this section. NC service PLC service The displays are used for debugging incorrect programs. The status display is used to show PLC data (e.g.: I, Q, ...). For description see Section 3, Start-up PLC Subsection ISTACK, detailed error coding, PLC status Drive MSD/ FDD For description see under subsection: Drive service displays for spindle and axis.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1.4 Selection of the diagnosis area Machine data For a description of the machine data dialog MDD (on SW3 and higher) see Section 5, Machine data dialog (MDD). For a description of NC-MD see Section 6, NC machine data (NC-MD), NC setting data (NC-SD). For a description of the drive MD see Section 7, drive machine data (SIMODRIVE drive MD). For a description of the PLC-MD see Section 8, PLC machine data (PLC-MD).
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1.4 Selection of the diagnosis area NCK power ON NCK power ON without voltage failure. Features: S MD are activated. S Reference point values are lost. S PC data are not updated. Terminate the machine data dialog (MDD). Start-up end 4.2 NC Service For drive optimization and error diagnosis it is necessary to check the data transmitted from the NC to the axes or spindles and from the axis or spindles to the NC.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.2 NC Service S Parameter set conversion Selected parameter set is displayed. S Service no. See the Diagnostics Guide for the list of service nos. Service values are displayed in double size, i.e. in position control resolution unit (e.g. following error displayed 2000 with position control resolution 0.5 mm , the result is a true following error of 1000 mm.
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.2.1 Selection of service data 4.2.1 Selection of service data Data range Diagnosis Service display NC service Further axes/ spindles Single axes Single spindles Service Axes single display Following error Absolute actual value Absolute setpoint value Abs. compensation val. Speed set value (0.01%) Part actual value Contour deviation Synchronous run error Parameter block position control Parameter block gear control Service number Axis 1 (1–8) Fig.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.2.1 Selection of service data The figure for single display is updated more frequently than the figure for several axes and spindles. Note Use the single figure for exact control. Change to the following axes with “Page down” key. If you enter the digit “8” and press the search key, e.g. axis 8 can be selected directly. You can move back to the previous axes with the “Page up” key. 4.2.
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.2.2 Service data for the spindle Selection of the spindle service data The display of the service data is selected with the softkey Diagnosis, Service displays. Selection see also Section 5.4. You change over to the following axes with the “Page down” key. You enter the digit “4” and press the search key to select directly axis 4, for example. If necessary, you move back to the previous axes with the “Page up” key. 4.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Explanation of display fields MSD 1st screen Drive status This display field describes the ramp-up and operating status of the digital drives. This status is generated in the SERVO during start-up and then changed accordingly in the display (SW 4: Drive MD 11008).
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Message ZK1 This display field contains the state of message state class 1 of cyclic status word 1 (drive MD 11002.0). Possible display range: off or on. Pulse enable actual This display field contains the state of enabled pulses of cyclic status word 2 (drive MD 11003.7). Possible display range: off or on DC link This display field contains the status of the DC link (drive MD 11006.0).
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Drive service display MSD 2nd screen MSD 2nd screen Press the MSD 2nd screen softkey in the service area for drive MSD/FDD. Fig. 4.7 Explanation The drive service display MSD 2nd screen gives you an overview of the signals and statuses of the MSD drives and is only a display. The specific drive data (NC, PLC, Drives) set, determine the contents of the display fields.
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Speed setpoint This display field contains the status of speed setpoint smoothing of cyclic status smoothing actual value word 1 (drive MD 11002.11). Ramp-function generator rapid stop This display field contains the status of ram-function generator rapid stop of cyclic status word 1 (drive MD 11002.9).
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Motor temperature This display field shows the current motor temperature (SW 3: drive MD 1/SW 4: drive MD 1702). Status of binary inputs (SW 3) This display field contains the state of the binary input (drive MD 11). Possible display range: 0000 – FFFF Display of active functions 1 (SW 3) This display field contains the current status of active functions 1 (drive MD 254).
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Feed drive This display field describes the currently selected FDD drive as selected via softkeys drive +/–. Ramp-up phase This display field contains the control word for the ramp-up control of the 611D components and exists for each logical digital drive number (drive MD 11000).
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Active power (SW 4) This display field shows the current active power (drive MD 11011). Smoothed current actual value This display field shows the smoothed current actual value in percent (drive MD 1708). Motor temperature This display field shows the current motor temperature (drive MD 1702).
4 09.95 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.3 Drive service displays for spindle (MSD) and axis (FDD) – as from SW 3) Parking axis setpoint This display field shows the status of parking axis of cyclic control word 1 (drive MD 11004.1) Possible display range: off or on Travel to fixed stop actual This display field contains the status of Travel to fixed stop of cyclic status word 2 (drive MD 11003.
08.96 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4 PC data 4.4 PC data All data not documented in the following sections must not be changed. Overview \ Alt \LIST MODULE \LANGUAGES JOB LIST \WOP \MESS. ATTR. \CONFIG. \MASTER CONTROL \BASIC SETTINGS \OPERATION \USER \FUNCTION AREAS ... MELDTEXT BEDCONF BEDCONF WOP FILES \DIAGNOSIS MELDINFO NEMOCLUT NECOLLI POCOLLI POCOCLUT ANWMTEXT NECOCLUT NECOCLUT POMOCLUT POCOCLUT POMOCLUT NEMOCLUT Fig. 4.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.1 Copying and editing PC data Keyswitch If the keyswitch is in position 3 when the system starts up, the control takes its data from the SIEMENS branch. All user data are password protected. A case where this is necessary is, for example, after a system failure if the configuration files are wrongly parameterized. Note This does no apply to the CONFIG file in the directory Master Control.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.1 Copying and editing PC data ! Danger Up to SW 4: The data in the USER branch are overwritten without confirmation. As from SW5: When you press softkey PRESET you are asked whether you really want to overwrite the data in the USER branch. Example Suppose we want to copy the file CONFIG into the directory MASTER CONTROL. First press the Home key to select the SIEMENS branch in the basic display of the PC data.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.1 Copying and editing PC data PRESET Press the softkey PRESET to copy the file into the USER branch (from SW 5 a configuration window is also displayed). Fig. 4.13 It does not matter which branch is selected. The PRESET softkey always copies the file selected in the SIEMENS branch.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG Any files which are not documented here must not be edited. Selection: SK ... , PC data Fig. 4.14 Data format of the configuration file The configuration file is stored in ASCII format. It consists of a series of lines of up to 80 characters each. Each line consists of a reserved word. Comments begin with the characters // and go on to the end of the line.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG 4.4.2.1 Keywords Keywords are words reserved by the system.
09.01 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG 4.4.2.2 Value ranges and default values Keyword Value range LANGUAGE String of max. 8 characters “DEUTSCH” BT_NAME String of max. 8 characters “SER:” PROTLEN1 1 – 32767 (with PROTMODEDISK) 25 PROTLEN2 1 – 32767 (1–200 without PROTMODEDISK) 25 FLUSHLEN1 0 .. 10 0 FLUSHLEN2 0 .. 10 2 FLUSHTIME 0.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG BT_Name FlexOS name of the operator panel interface. For operation without the operator panel enter “” only. The default setting is “SER” (upper case mandatory). PROTLEN1 This defines the number of messages that are entered in alarm log 1. PROTLEN2 This defines the number of messages that are entered in alarm log 2. FLUSHLEN1 Maximum number of messages buffered for the alarm log (lost on voltage failure).
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG For example, the interpretation of following configuration entry: PROTMASK1 PROTMASK1 PROTMASK2 K = OT < 4 K > OP < 100 N1000 – 110000 All the NCK alarms with a message type smaller than 4 are entered in the alarm log (i.e. power-on until PLC alarm) and all non-NCK messages with a priority smaller than 100. All messages with numbers between 1000 and 110000 are entered in the service log. TFORMAT Format for times in the logs.
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG You can reactivate the write enable function on the hard disk of the MMC CPU making an entry to the configuration file of the master control CONFIG (PROTMODE DISK). This way you can provide for the same compatible behavior as is applicable to systems with SW 6 and lower. In addition, a cache has been built in for alarm descriptions (SW 6 and higher). This reduces the read accesses to a minimum.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.3 BEDCONF configuration file 4.4.3.1 Configuration file BEDCONF in directory Operation/Basic Setting // . 0 0 0 reftab.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.
09.95 04.96 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.
08.96 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.3 BEDCONF configuration file BPOSNEG_DEF The parameter BPOSNEG_DEF sets whether the screen display is to be in positive mode (enter PO) or in negative mode (enter NE). You can enter PO or NE here but be sure to enter the parameter in capital letters. Positive mode means black lettering on a white background and negative mode means white lettering on a black background.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.3 BEDCONF configuration file The parameters below contain the preset values for block generation. BEASATZNR_FLAG_ DFLT The BEASATZNR_FLAG_DFLT word specifies the selection; block number YES parameter = 1 or block number NO parameter = 0. BAESATZNR_STEP_ DFLT The value specified in BAESATZNR_STEP_DFLT defines the block number steps. BAESATZNR_START_ DFLT The starting address is specified in BAESATZNR_START_DFLT.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.3 BEDCONF configuration file With a main memory capacity of 16 MB the mutual exclusion of certain applications can be cancelled. This is the case for the mutual exclusion of the optional applications WOP and SIMULATION.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.3 BEDCONF configuration file The configured texts are activated on Power on. 35 36 37 38 39 LF a 4 5 232 \ ’– ’ ’Slide1’ ’Slide2’ ’PORTAL’ ’Loader’ LF d 1 1 0 LF LF // Values for Fig. 4.16 4.4.3.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists 4.4.4 Color definition tables 4.4.4.1 10” color display (up to SW 4.4) 6FC5 103–0ABV2–0BA0 Introduction In the color definition tables, you can define the individual colors by mixing RGB proportions. The operator system reserves a default color table for each of the possible system settings in the BEDCONF file combining positive or negative with color or monochrome mode.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists Changing the file POCOCLUT for the MACHINE area PRESET If no CLUTs are available in the user branch OPERATION/MACHINE, they must be copied from the Siemens branch to the user branch with the softkey. Fig. 4.18 The file POCOCLUT is selected with the cursor in the user area OPERATION/ MACHINE and softkey EDIT. Fig. 4.
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists SAVE The change is made in the ASCII editor and must be saved on the hard disk using the softkey save. The new colors become active after the next POWER ON. The value range for each primary color is between 0 and 1000. 1000 is the highest intensity of color.
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists 4.4.4.2 New 19” operator panel as from SW 4.5 (5) 6FC5 103–0ABVV–VAA1 Standard CLUT table There is a new standard POCOCLUT and NECOCLUT table for color. The values entered then apply to the 19” operator panel with a 14” color screen and the 19” slimline operator panel with a 9.5” color screen. The standard POMOCLUT and NEMOCLUT are also adapted to the new 19” slimline operator panel with a 9.5” monochrome screen.
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists 4.4.4.3 Defining individual color tables (as from SW 5.4) Introduction As from SW 5.4, the user can define his own color tables (for example, for different displays). The names for the color tables (object type clut) of the applications are selectable; however, some rules must be observed.
09.95 04.96 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists 4.4.5 Color mapping lists Introduction The operator system works with symbolic colors represented by numbers within the range 0 to 127. For example, the background of the softkey bars is in color 65. A real color (from the color table) is assigned to color 65 in a color mapping list. A color mapping list consists of 127 entries. The position of each entry in the list corresponds to the number of a color.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists Example 1 Suppose we want to change the background color of the softkey bar. In the (with color and table for assigning picture elements to symbolic colors, the symbolic positive display modes) color code for the softkey bar background is the number 65. In the color mapping list, a number 8 is entered at position 65. In the color definition table POCOCLUT, number 8 stands for grey.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.5 Color mapping lists Symbolic color Picture elements Background color Text color Configuration area 0 and 1 89 free 88 –– –– Application field 88 –– –– –– –– Cursor text in config.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.6 Color settings for monochrome display 4.4.6 Color settings for monochrome display 4.4.6.1 10” monochrome display (up to SW 4.4) Introduction 6FC5 103–0ABV2–0AA0 The BEDCONF, NECOLLI and NEMOCLUT files have to be edited for improving the quality of the screen display. In addition, an anti-reflex filter for the screen has to be installed, order number 6FC5148–0AC01–0AA0.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.4.7 Cycles 4.4.7 Cycles Press the DIAGNOSIS and PC DATA softkeys to select the cycles area. This area is password-protected. Save as cycle SPF .. subroutines stored in a workpiece in the LOCAL or GLOBAL directory can be copied into the NC/data directory in the user branch, which defines them as user cycles. They can then be protected in the same way as standard cycles via cycle disable (see Interface, Part 1). User cycles in the NC/DATA directory cannot be edited.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.5 Activating options (as from SW3) 4.5 Activating options (as from SW3) Press the DIAGNOSIS/START-UP/OPTIONS softkeys to change over to the Options basic display. Fig. 4.21 Note A PLC cold restart is required before you can implement PLC expansions. Note The total number of real axes limits the entry “Axis exists” in the menu NC configuration This also applies to spindles, channels and mode groups. MODIFY OPTIONS Press the MODIFY OPTIONS softkey to select the function.
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.5 Activating options (as from SW3) Press the select key to select. ACTIVATE OPTIONS Notes Press the ACTIVATE OPTIONS key for activating the selected option. The options Graphic Programming System Turning/Milling, DIN simulation, PG software and special languages cannot be activated via the menu Start-up/Options. This installation is always performed via menu item “Install MMC system” in the BACK-UP menu (see Section 4.6, BACKUP with Valitek streamer).
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.6 BACKUP with Valitek streamer/PC link Accessing the CD ROM via PC link software (SW 6 and higher) Installation sequence A software update can be made with PC link (SW 6 and higher). The software is delivered on CD ROM. 10.Install the PC link on the external PC by starting the file ”install.bat” 11. The control is connected to the external PC via parallel cable.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.6 BACKUP with Valitek streamer/PC link Selecting BACKUP Press the softkeys DIAGNOSIS then START-UP 1) then BACKUP to obtain the basic display for BACKUP. When BACKUP is selected, the entire MMC area is stopped. The NC must be in the RESET state. When you have pressed the softkey BACKUP the following screen appears: Fig. 4.22 START Press the softkey START to activate the function BACKUP.
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.6 BACKUP with Valitek streamer/PC link Backup menu tree 1 Restore/backup (first install correct streamer with Item 2/Item3 set streamer type) 1 Install MMC system When you select menu item 1, new MMC software, SW options (e.g. graphic programming) or software updates are transferred to and installed on the hard disk. 2 Backup system With the 2nd menu item it is possible to perform a complete system BACKUP, i.e.
01.99 09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.6 BACKUP with Valitek streamer/PC link 2 Setup / Configure options 1 Setup WOP options See Configuring Guide Graphic Programming System 2 Create WOP working file Service function for creating a new WOP working file 3 4 Set I/O device 1 Valitek PST–160 2 Valitek PST2 – M1200 3 Valitek PST2 – M1200 to read PST–160 tapes 4 PC link Set disk check Settings for checking the consistency of the file system on the hard disk (similar to the DOS command CHKDSK).
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.7 Customer UMS Activating the hard disk options (up to SW 3 only) The hard disk is configured with 5 Mbytes for user data. It is possible to use more memory area if one or several hard disk options are activated. A hard disk option makes one of three areas of the hard disk available for additional user data: an area of 5 Mbytes, an area of 10 Mbytes and an area of 20 Mbytes.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8 Functions up to SW 2 4.8 Functions up to SW 2 4.8.1 NC data management (up to SW 2) As from SW 3 NC data management has been moved to the Services area. Please refer to the Operator’s Guide for more detailed information. The description below applies to SW 1 and SW 2. In the area DIAGNOSIS/NC DATA management, data for the NCK can be saved to hard disk or loaded from the hard disk into the NCK memory. It is also possible to edit them in the ASCII editor.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.1 NC data management (up to SW 2) MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM. SERVICES DIAGNOSIS 14:22 Start-up/SIEMENS/NC data NC/data Name ... Length Date Length Date Start-up/User/NC data NC/data Name .. TEA1 SEA1 SEA1 SAVE 96145 96145 10440 EDIT 02–17–1993 02–18–1992 02–17–1993 13:21:22 08:06:36 13:21:44 LOAD Fig. 4.23 You can only save, edit and load in the user branch. This function is password protected. SAVE The data are loaded from the NCK CPU to the hard disk.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.1 NC data management (up to SW 2) During data transmission the following dialog text appears: !!! Transmission of NC to PC active !!! If a file of the same name already exists, you are asked if you want to overwrite this file: PC data exist. Overwrite ? You acknowledge with the OK softkey. OK LOAD Press the softkey LOAD to load the data selected into the NCK CPU. The password must have been entered in the NCK area.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.2 PLC data (up to SW 2) 4.8.2 PLC data (up to SW 2) As from SW 3 NC data management has been moved to the Services area. Please refer to the Operator’s Guide for more detailed information. In the DIAGNOSIS PLC data management area you can save PCF files or PLC machine data on the hard disk or load them from the hard disk into the NCK memory. You can also edit them in the USER branch.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.3 PCF files (up to SW 2) 4.8.3 PCF files (up to SW 2) From SW 3 the files MELDDATR and MELDTEXT are responsible for the entire alarm concept. Configuration is described in the Interface Description Part 1, Signals. PCF files are files in which the user can store alarm texts and messages. The files are assigned to the language defined in the configuration file KONFIG.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.3 PCF files (up to SW 2) Creating a file in the SERVICES area Select the SERVICES area. SERVICES Press the MANAGEMENT softkey. MANAGEMENT Press NEW softkey. NEW Select PLC in the directory of all possible subdirectories in the user branch using the cursor keys and accept with INPUT. Position the cursor on DATA and accept with INPUT. The directory of all available languages is displayed.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.3 PCF files (up to SW 2) MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM. SERVICES DIAGNOSIS 11:33 Start-up/SIEMENS/PLC data PLC/data Name .. DEUTSCH ENGLISCH ESPANOL FRANCAIS ITALIANO TEA2 12258 Start-up/User/PLC data Length Date 03–09–1993 15:46:08 PLC/data Name .. PCF1 18 03–12–1993 11:14:00 LADER PCF11 TUER1 0 0 0 03–12–1993 03–12–1993 03–12–1993 11:10:34 11:02:14 11:05:08 SAVE Length EDIT Date OK LOAD Fig. 4.27 Press LOAD softkey.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.3 PCF files (up to SW 2) You can create the PCF file with the ASCII editor, configuring is described in Interface Description Part 1. The ASCII editor is described in the Operator’s Guide. You store the file onto the hard disk with the SAVE softkey. SAVE Creating and editing PCF files in the programming area (NCK area) Press the area switchover key. Press programming key. Programm. EDIT NC SELECT PROGRAM Press the edit NC softkey.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.8.3 PCF files (up to SW 2) Setting data for PCF files: You define the active PCF file in the general setting data. The setting data are described in the Operator’s Guide. MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM. SERVICES DIAGNOSIS 16:38 JOG BAG Kanal PROGRAM RESET :1 :1 General data ' & ( ) * ) * % ) * ( + , ( - . Work area limitation Fig. 4.
09.95 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.9 Equivalent keys on the PC keyboard and the operator panel 4.9 Equivalent keys on the PC keyboard and the operator panel The following table lists all keys that have a different form on the PC keyboard and the operator panel control but the same function.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1 General remarks 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1 General remarks Introduction The SINUMERIK 840C and Machine Data Dialog operation. The Machine Data Dialog replaces the conventional method of entering machine data via lists. Wherever possible, the machine data are represented in their real units. Complicated relationships are represented and input via configuring displays.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1 General remarks Note Press the info key to display a short description of the machine configuration. Fig. 5.1 Explanation The machine configuration display gives you an overview of the current data record and is only a display. The functions and setpoint/actual value assignment for each of the spindles and axes are displayed for the data that you have entered in the data record.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1 General remarks Axes S Name: The name of the axis appears in this window when NC MD 5680 ff (axis name) is set. Possible input values are: X–X15, Y–Y15, Z–Z15, A–A15, B–B15, C–C15, U–U15, V–V15, W–W15, Q–Q15, E–E15. S Function: Possible display texts are (when NC MD 5640.7 ff – axis exists–input = yes) – “Linear” : NC MD 5640.5 ff (rotary axis) Input = No – “Rotary” : NC MD 5640.5 ff (rotary axis) Input = Yes – “Following” : NC MD 18440.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1.1 General notes on operation 5.1.1 General notes on operation Search Explanation Search (SW 3 and higher) Select the Search function with this key. With this function you can either search for a “Term” (e.g. following spindle) or a machine data. When you have selected the function an input field appears, in which you enter either the term or the machine data which you then acknowledge with the input key.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1.1 General notes on operation MD info window (SW 3 and higher) Select the MD info window function with the “End” hardkey. Fig. 5.2 Explanation With the “End” hardkey you can call up an info window for any machine data on which the cursor is placed (not in Machine configuration). Minimum and maximum values, the internal representation, any relationships with other machine data and any inputs if they exist (e.g.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1.1 General notes on operation Current controller: MD 1120 P gain current controller (FDD/MSD) MD 1121 Reset time current controller (FDD/MSD) Flux controller: MD 1150 P gain flux controller (MSD) MD 1151 Reset time flux controller (MSD) Torque and output limits: MD 1230 1st torque limit (FDD) MD 1235 1st output limit (FDD) Speed interface normalization: MD 1401 Speed for max.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1.2 Fast switching between MDD and service display (as from SW 5) 5.1.2 Fast switching between MDD and service display (as from SW 5) Service displays for axes In all axis specific displays it is possible to select the axis service display with the highest vertical softkey. The data are requested via I code 20E. The refresh rate is 59 ms in a state of rest. Axis service display Fig. 5.
09.95 08.96 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1.2 Fast switching between MDD and service display (as from SW 5) Service display for several axes Fig. 5.4 In the three-axis display, the units column is omitted for space reasons. Selecting columns The columns are selected using the home key. In each column which is selected, the axis can be selected as in the single-axis display. Softkey << You can return to the previous axis display with the vertical softkey “<<”.
09.95 08.96 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2 NC configuration and NC machine data (as from SW 3) 5.2 NC configuration and NC machine data (as from SW 3) 5.2.1 NC configuration Selection Diagnosis Start-up Machine data NC MD Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and NC MD softkeys to call the NC configuration display. Note A brief description of the NC configuration and NC machine data is displayed when you press the info key.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.1 NC configuration Spindle S Mode group: The assignment of mode group to spindle is determined by the setting in NC MD 4530 ff (spindle valid in mode group). S Available: The spindle is displayed as existing when NC MD 5210.7 ff (spindle exists) is set. Axis No. S Mode group: The assignment of mode group to axis no. is determined by the setting in NC MD 3600 ff (axis no. valid in mode group).
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.2 NC machine data 5.2.2 NC machine data Menu tree NC MD General NC MD (1) Geometry motion (2) Channel Axis Spindle Gearbox interpol. (3) (4) (5) (6) File functions (7) Memory config. (SW 4) (8) (1) General Basic MD Face axis functions Modes Keyswitch Technology MD Computer link File functions (2) Geometry MD Coupl. axis combin. Coord. Override transform.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.2 NC machine data Note A list of the individual NC machine data is given on the following pages. The machine data are grouped according to their functions within these areas. The functions of the individual machine data are described in the section entitled “NC Machine Data” where they are listed alphanumerically. A number of machine data depend on the parameter set (see “Selecting a displayed parameter number”).
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.2 NC machine data Softkey Controller data This softkey contains position controller, compensation, feedforward control, filter setting and travel to fixed stop machine data. SW 4 also contains quadrant error compensation (from SW 4.4) machine data. Softkey LEC This softkey contains various leadscrew error compensation machine data.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.3 Setpoint-Actual value matching for axes and spindles 5.2.3 Setpoint-Actual value matching for axes and spindles The following NC machine data still have to be set before you can operate the drives after drive installation. You will find them by pressing the Diagnosis/Startup/Machine data/NC MD softkeys for the Axes (FDD) or Spindles (MSD) and then Basic MD softkey.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.4 Measuring system adaptation for axes and spindles (as from SW 4) 5.2.4 Measuring system adaptation for axes and spindles (as from SW 4) Explanation Notes This function is used to automatically calculate the position control resolution and measuring system resolution (optimization of the closed position control loop). You will find the function under the softkey path Machine data/NC MD/Axis (or Spindle) measuring system data.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.
09.95 08.96 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.2.5 Copying a complete machine data block (as from SW 5.6) 5.2.5 Copying a complete machine data block (as from SW 5.6) General The “NC configuration” basic screen contains the softkeys for copying and inserting complete spindle and axis data blocks. The “Drive configuration” basic screen contains the softkeys for drive data blocks. Precondition The password is set.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.3 PLC configuration and PLC machine data (as from SW 3) 5.3 PLC configuration and PLC machine data (as from SW 3) 5.3.1 PLC configuration Selection Diagnosis Start-up Machine data PLC MD The PLC configuration display appears on the screen when you press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and PLC MD softkeys. Note A brief description of the PLC configuration and PLC machine data appears on the screen when you press the info key. Fig. 5.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.3.1 PLC configuration S Address: The address assignment for the 1st machine control panel is determined in PLC MD 128 (initial address for 1st machine control panel). S TT machine: The setting in PLC MD 6066.4 (configuration 1st machine control panel TT machine) determines whether the machine is a T or a TT machine (double slide). T machine: Input = No TT machine: Input = Yes S Direction key processing: The setting in PLC MD 6066.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.3.2 PLC machine data 5.3.2 PLC machine data Menu tree PLC MD Peripheral setting Alarms, messages (1) (2) PLC basic data (3) User MD (4) Tool managem. (5) Computer link (6) File functions (7) (1) DMP config.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.3.2 PLC machine data (1) PLC MD/Peripherals setting Softkey DMP configuration This softkey contains various interface DMP interface and PLC 135 WD user machine data. Softkey Interrupts This softkey contains central and distributed interrupt machine data. Softkey Process alarms This softkey contains various process alarm machine data. (2) PLC MD/Alarm messages Softkey General This softkey contains general message and alarm machine data.
09.95 08.96 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.4 Drive configuration and drive machine data (as from SW 3) 5.4 Drive configuration and drive machine data (as from SW 3) 5.4.1 Drive configuration Selection Diagnosis Start-up Machine data Drive MD Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and Drive MD softkeys to display the drive configuration display. Note Press the info key for a short description of the drive configuration and drive machine data. Copy/ insert Fig. 5.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.4.2 Drive machine data for axes (FDD) and spindles (MSD) 5.4.2 Drive machine data for axes (FDD) and spindles (MSD) Menu tree Drive MD Axis (FDD) (1) (1) (2) Note Motor/PS data Monitor’g, Message limitation data Motor/PS data Monitor’g, Message limitation data Meas. sys. data Meas. sys.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.4.2 Drive machine data for axes (FDD) and spindles (MSD) Softkey Status Data This softkey contains status display, current values (drive/servo), status register, motor encoder diagnostics, min., max. memory, monitor function, I/F mode, diagnostics servo and communications servo/611D machine data. SW 3 also contains monitoring memory location and transient recorder function machine data.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.4.3 Axis/spindle start-up for the digital drive (as from SW 3) Note Any number from 1 to 15 (up to SW 4, from SW 5, 1-30) in any order can be used for the drive number. Power-up is performed and the bus initialized using the softkey Accept conf + NCKPO. The message Start-up necessary is also displayed, i.e. the individual axes and spindles connected to the drive bus do not have a machine data record.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.4.3 Axis/spindle start-up for the digital drive (as from SW 3) On SW5 and higher, it is possible to enter non-Siemens motors for which only the rating plate data of the motor is known and not the equivalent circuit diagram data (motor data). After you have pressed the softkey Non-Siemens motor 1 (Non-Siemens motor 2) and confirmed the query with the OK softkey the control enters code number 99 for non-Siemens motors.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.5 Cycles machine data (as from SW 3) 5.5 Cycles machine data (as from SW 3) Selection Diagnosis Start-up Machine data Cycles MD Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and Cycle MD softkeys to call up the cycles machine data display. Fig. 5.8 Explanation Measuring cycles and machining cycles are available for standard machining routines that are repeated several times.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.6 IKA data (interpolation and compensation with tables – as from SW 3) 5.6 IKA data (interpolation and compensation with tables – as from SW 3) Selection Diagnosis Start-up Machine data IKA data Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and IKA data softkeys to call up the IKA data display. Fig. 5.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.6 IKA data (interpolation and compensation with tables – as from SW 3) individual data are described in the functional description of “Interpolation and compensation with tables” (Installation Guide). IKA data Softkey IKA configuration This softkey contains various IKA data (T parameters) that define the configuration.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.7 User displays (as from SW 3) 5.7 User displays (as from SW 3) Selection Diagnosis Start-up Machine data User displays Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and User MD softkeys to call up the User displays screen. Fig. 5.10 Explanation The user can configure his own lists of machine data in the NC data, NC axis, NC spindle, PLC data, Drive FDD and Drive MSD areas which are accessed by operating the User displays softkey.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.7.1 Edit list 5.7.1 Edit list Edit list Select the softkey edit list in the User display area. Fig. 5.11 Explanation The header contains information about the display format and addressing the data. Only the parameters for the display layout in the header may be altered.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.7.1 Edit list machine data, place the cursor on a free or an occupied line. Then select the required function using the softkey Insert/overwrite and then enter the machine data number. Jump back to the user displays using the Save softkey and the Recall key and the machine data is then displayed with text. You can define customer-specific intermediate headings in the list. These headings are marked with H+No., e.g. H0 8 you insert a space line.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8 File functions (as from SW 3) 5.8 File functions (as from SW 3) 5.8.1 1st level: Machine configuration (as from SW 3) Fig. 5.12 Drive MD NC MD PLC MD Cycle MD IKA data User MD File functions Explanation On the first level the file functions refer to all the machine data areas (Drives, NC, PLC, Cycles, IKA). The data selector always displays the relevent files (TEA3, TEA1, TEA2, TEA4, IKA1, IKA2, IKA3).
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.2 2nd level: Configuring the individual machine data areas (as from SW 3) In the case of “Save all” the NQEC parameterization including the measured values from the NCK/servo are read out and stored in ASCII files under the selected name. In the case of “Load all”, the selected NQEC ASCII files are read in and stored as boot files.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.3 3rd level: Configuring within the machine data areas of individual machine data displays (as from SW 3) 5.8.3 3rd level: Configuring within the machine data areas of individual machine data displays (as from SW 3) Motor/ PS data Monitoring limitation Message data Meas. sys. data Controller data Status data File functions Message data Meas. sys. data Controller data Status data File functions Message data Meas. sys.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.3 3rd level: Configuring within the machine data areas of individual machine data displays (as from SW 3) User MD (TEA2) Edit list Edit texts File functions Tool management (TEA2) Basic data Magazine 1 Magazine 2 Magazine 3 Magazine 4 File functions Computer link (TEA2) System setting General functions Tool dialog code carr. File functions Central cycle MD (TEA4) Central cycle MD File functions Channel dependent cycle MD (TEA4) Chan. dep.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.4 File functions (sequence of operation – as from SW 3) 5.8.4 File functions (sequence of operation – as from SW 3) 5.8.4.1 1st level: File functions Diagnosis Start-up Machine data File functions Explanation Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and File functions softkeys to call the 1st level file functions display. Fig. 5.13 Edit New Edit Delete A new file can be created. You are prompted to enter a name.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.4 File functions (sequence of operation – as from SW 3) Copy Save to disk Load from disk Note Selected file can be copied. The on-line file data are saved into the selected file. Here again the BOOT file has a special status (see drive installation/start-up). The lower user data area must be selected. The selected file is loaded into the NCK. The on-line file and the BOOT file cannot be loaded.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.4 File functions (sequence of operation – as from SW 3) Fig. 5.14 Explanation The functions of the individual softkeys are the same as for the first level. Notes With the Save to disk softkey, you can choose between Conf (8 drive configuration only) and All. With the Load from disk softkey, you can choose between Conf (8 drive configuration only) and Drives (8 drive MD without configuration), i.e.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.4 File functions (sequence of operation – as from SW 3) 5.8.4.3 3rd level: File functions Selection (Example drive MD axis) Diagnosis Start-up Machine data Drive MD Axis (FDD) File functions Explanation Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data, Drive MD (e.g.), Axis (FDD) and File functions softkeys to call up the 3rd level file functions display. Fig. 5.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.8.4 File functions (sequence of operation – as from SW 3) Example: File function 3rd level NC MD This can be seen from the example of the NC machine data structure. On the 3rd level, in each case the display contents (selected list display) are saved or loaded, and this can be extended to include (for instance) all the data of an individual axis or all axes.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9 Procedure for altering configurations 5.9 Procedure for altering configurations 5.9.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.1 Standard installation of digital drives (SW 3 and higher) Motor selection Press the Diagnosis/Start-up/Machine data/Drive MD and Axis (FDD) or Spindle (MSD) softkeys to call up the display motor/PS data to make the motor selection. Select the actual motor type with the Enter motor softkey. Once you have selected all the motors confirm these settings with the Accept all + NCKP0 softkey in the previous display. Fig. 5.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.2 Adding a 1-axis FDD module (as from SW 3) 5.9.2 Adding a 1-axis FDD module (as from SW 3) Specifications Module slots: Slot 1: (Installation location) Slot 2: Slot 3: Slot 4: Slot 6: MSD module free free 2 axis FDD module 1 axis FDD module Entering the drive configuration Enter the additional 1 axis FDD module for slot 2 (installation location) in the drive configuration display. Select the actual module type with Select module softkey.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.3 Replacing a 1-axis FDD module with a 2-axis FDD module (as from SW 3) 5.9.3 Replacing a 1-axis FDD module with a 2-axis FDD module (as from SW 3) Requirement A 1-axis FDD module is to be replaced by a 2-axis FDD module with the same current rating. Module slots: Slot 1: (Installation loc.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.4 Replacing a 2-axis FDD module (9/18 A) with a 2-axis FDD module (18/36 A) (as from SW3) 5.9.4 Replacing a 2-axis FDD module (9/18 A) with a 2-axis FDD module (18/36 A) (as from SW3) Specifications A 2-axis FDD module (9/18 A) is to be replaced by a 2-axis FDD module (18/36 A) with a higher current rating. Module slots: (Installation loc.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.5 Drive active or passive (as from SW3) 5.9.5 Drive active or passive (as from SW3) Application For example, when using a 2-axis FDD module, one of the axes is disconnected from the bus temporarily. Procedure Switch the axis from the active to the passive state in the drive configuration display. Confirm this setting with the Accept Conf + NCKP0 softkey.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.6 Using a new motor type (as from SW 3) 5.9.6 Using a new motor type (as from SW 3) Application A new motor type is to be installed on the machine tool. The same drive module is used. Procedure Operate the Enter motor softkey in the Motor/PS data display. Select the type of motor you want. If you are using a motor made by a different manufacturer, you must adapt the motor data from a data sheet.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.7 Reinstallation of existing and new drive components using the existing drive files (TEA3) 5.9.7 Reinstallation of existing and new drive components using the existing drive files (TEA3) Application You require a two-tier configuration, i.e. a 2nd module group is to be added. TEA3 user files already exist for the individual modules and motors.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.9.7 Reinstallation of existing and new drive components using the existing drive files (TEA3) Fig. 5.24 Procedure 2 Select the File functions softkey in the machine configuration display and operate the Load from disk softkey. A menu bar appears into which you enter the required TEA3 file together with file name and select the All MD area with the toggle key. Press the Load start softkey. The data are loaded into the BOOT file.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.10 Configuring the MDD 5.10 Configuring the MDD 5.10.1 Description The MDD is configured with the list module (as from SW4). The texts in the screens can be edited. The data that are to be displayed in the screens have been configured. As from SW 5, it is possible to print out the list module.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.10.1 Description The paths and file names and simple examples of file contents (configuring data) are explained in the points below. Other configuration possibilities are given in the lists in the control. List module paths and files (e.g. TEA1 MD) ASCII lists: S Data lists (e.g.) SIEMENS list module/TEA1/LB data lists/nc11 User list module/TEA1/LB data lists/nc11 S Text lists (e.g.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.10.2 Practical example for user adaptation list display List contents: Text lists Examples: The texts for all data are stored in the text lists. 2040 2080 5600.0 5600.2 “Exact stop limit coarse” “Exact stop limit fine” “No measuring circuit monitoring” “Rounding to whole/half degrees” List contents: Semantic lists The data type (L = long, C = 8 bits, S = short, etc.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.10.2 Practical example for user adaptation list display Solution The following steps are necessary: 1. The file list of the display in which the data is to appear must be copied completely from the Siemens branch to the user branch (“Services” area) so that the user semantics and user text lists are used. Data 2007 is contained in display “PLC MD/Tool management/Magazine 1” when supplied. Data list plc52.103 also belongs here.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.10.3 Configuring the parameter set switchover in the list display c) The already altered characteristics of a data are to be changed again or the characteristics of another data in the same display are to be changed.
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.10.3 Configuring the parameter set switchover in the list display for which the following short-hand notation can now be used (SW 4 and higher): Example: 1500:1–8 By resorting it is possible to display in the usual way first all the data of the first parameter set, then the data of the second parameter set, etc. Example: 1407:1 1409:1 1500:1 ... 1407:2 1409:2 1500:2 ... 1407:3 1409:3 1500:3 ...
09.95 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.10.4 Printing the list module data (as from SW 5) Example: headline “S16 P3 N7” This reserves 16 characters for the parameter name (e.g. the word “axis”), 3 characters for the current parameter number (e.g. axis number) and 7 characters for the number of the current parameter (e.g. “C2”). In the same way it is now possible to display the name of the parameter set group and the current parameter set number in additional fields.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a aaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a aa aa a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aa a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a aaa aaa a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1.3 Configuring information 6.1.3 Configuring information Two 1) mode groups and four 1) channels can be implemented on the SINUMERIK 840C. The channels are allocated to the mode groups via machine data, i.e. the channels are subordinate to the mode groups. The available axes are also allocated to the mode groups via machine data. Basically, each channel is comparable to a separate machine.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1.3 Configuring information 12.93 Tasks performed by the master channel Within a mode group, the channels are processed in ascending order. Internally, the first channel of a mode group (the channel with the lowest number) assumes the role of master channel. If the signals • • mode group DRF are specified in the master channel (DB 10 to DB 13) 1), they then also apply to all other channels of this mode group.
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1.4 Breakdown of NC MDs/drive machine data 6.1.4 Breakdown of NC MDs/drive machine data NC MD 0 to 999 1000 to 1599 2000 to 3999 4000 to 4999 5000 to 5199 5200 to 5399 5400 to 5599 5600 to 5999 6000 to 6999 9000 to 9299 11000 to 17969 18000 to 18599 20400 to 20449 2400* to 3944*1) Description Softkey Section General MD General data 6.2 Channel-specific MD Channel data 6.3 Axis-specific MD 1 Axial data 1 6.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 6.2 03.
a a aaaaaaa a aaa aaa aaa a aaaaa aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaa aaa aaa a aaaaa aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaa a a a aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa aaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 12.93 Note: The reduction speed with G62 is not quite reached. The error tolerance band is described as follows.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Active in next block 6 Threshold for switchover intersection * Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units +0 16 000 2 000 (as from SW 4) units (IS) 1 000 One or two intermediate blocks are inserted for circle intersection (straight line/arc, arc/straight line and arc/arc) with external contours with circle intersections and obtuse angles (90° < < 180°) (see Programming Guide Section 10.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 7 03.95 Active in next block Circle end position monitoring Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 5 +0 32 000 units (IS) Before a circular block is processed, the NC checks the "correctness" of the programmed values by determining the difference between the radii for the starting and end positions.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1.4 Breakdown of NC MDs/drive machine data 13 Number of TO parameters Active see below Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 10 32 – Normally, each tool offset has up to ten permanently allocated TO parameters. When required, the user can upgrade the number of parameters to 32, and must allocate the added parameters (10 to 32) using the configuring terminal.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 09.95 14, 15 Password-protected R parameters 16, 17 Keyswitch-protected R parameters Active at once Active at once Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 999 * 1 299 (as from SW 4) – Appropriate specifications NC MD 14/15 and/or 16/17 make it possible to protect general and channel-specific R parameters. Channel-specific specifications apply to all channels.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 30 Active on Power On Number of Execution Memory Sectors Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 10 5 1 000 Sector Active: on POWER ON When ”Working from external” or from the hard disk, the part program is read into a circular buffer which executes the program at the same time. The circular buffer is part of the part program memory.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 100 - 130 12.93 Active at once Positions 2 to 32 of the feedrate override switch Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see below 0 150 % Use can be made of a feedrate override switch with up to 32 positions. The percent figures may be allocated as required except the far left (i.e. first) position, which is always 0 %.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 155 Active on Power On Position control basic cycle time Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 1 1) 4 Units Multiple of drive basic cycle time 40 The sampling interval is defined as the time after which the control outputs a new setpoint speed to the axes. For axes or spindles, this NC MD can be additionally influenced, i.e. slowed down by means of a multiplier (NC MD 1396* and 466*).
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 09.01 2. Delay for removal of the servo enable signal on the measuring circuit following "EMERGENCY STOP" and other errors resulting in immediate shutdown of the axes (e.g. contour monitoring). 3. Delay for removal of the servo enable signal on the measuring circuit when the PLC revokes the servo enable for an axis. 4. MD 156 is only active if MD 1224* is set to zero (servo enable delay).
09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 164 Active – Dead time for calculation for extended thread Default value Lower input limit 36 28 (SW 5 and higher) Upper input limit Units 48 1/8 of the IPO cycle – This machine data is preset by the system and should not be altered by the user. The function EXTENDED THREADING PACKAGE is required.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 09.95 The number of areas is specified in NC MD 210. The number of TO areas is limited to between 1 and 4. One TO area is provided when a value of 0 is entered. If the specified value exceeds 4, it is set to 4 internally and alarm 47 triggered. The limits of the TO areas are defined by specifying the TO start numbers in NC MD 211 to 214.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Absolute D number TO memory D no.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 250 09.95 Active on Power On Language switchover 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 – SINUMERIK 840C can display two languages at option.
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) When allocating the numbers, make sure that there is no collision with other M functions.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 09.95 MD 312: Mixed I/O assignment for first mode group MD 317: Mixed I/O assignment for sixth mode group The first decimal place (units) defines the output byte of the module. Mixed I/O (1, 2) PLC 1-4. The second decimal place (tens) defines the number of the mixed I/O module (counting from left to right). Mixed I/O (1, 2) PLC 9.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Deadtime compensation for dwell referred to axis Actual value (SW 4 and higher) 330 Default value Lower input limit 550 331 Upper input limit 0 16 000 Sine of angular range for tangential transitions TRC Default value 2 (=appr. ˆ 0.0005 degr.) Lower input limit 1 (=appr. ˆ 0.0003 degr.) Upper input limit 16 000 (=approx. ˆ 4.5 degr.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 335 07.97 Active at once Minimum reduction factor (as from SW 6) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 100 % The minimum reduction factor is entered as a percentage in the general machine data. The actual path velocity is adapted to the new set path velocity by way of the actual path acceleration.
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 339 2nd MCS offset in Z coordinates (as from SW 6) POWER ON Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 MS Note: For further information see description of the function collision monitoring.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 730 - 739 09.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 876 - 899 Active on Power On 1) Leading axis coupled axis Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 9 – The definition of these coupled axis groupings determines which axis is to be coupled when a leading axis is traversed in Jog mode or under program control.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 12.93 d. It must be possible to program the axes of one coupled axis grouping in the same channels MD 576* bits 7 to 0 and MD 580*, bits 7 to 0. e. The axes in a coupled axis grouping must be available (NC MD 564* bit 7 = 1). f. None of the axes of a coupled axis grouping is allowed to be a fictitious axis (NC MD 564* bit 6 = 0). g. One leading axis can couple several axes.
10.94 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) 100* Active on Power On Warm restart Mode group Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 0 (SW 4 and higher) 2 6 1) – MD 1000 must be set to "1" (default). Gaps are not allowed in MD 100*. If an error occurs, alarm 79 ”Mode group no. of channel invalid” is issued.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) 108*-122* 09.95 Active in block prior to decodg Reset state G group Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see below see table of input values see table of input values – The reset state for G groups 1, 3, 6, 8, 12, 15 and 25 may be defined on a channel-specific basis. Only those G functions shown in the table below may be specified in NC MD 108* to 122* for the relevant G group.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) 132* 09.95 Active – Device No. for Execution from external Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0 0 0 Units NC MD 132* defines the device type number used to read in data for "Execution from external" for each channel. The device number defines the device type in MD 130* in more detail (e.g. 1st or 2nd interface). This machine data is not necessary for software versions 1 and 2.
07.97 • 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) The function can also be switched off via the PLC (Program control, DB10-15, DR14, bit 3, DL2, bit 3). The channel-specific initial settings for ZO (G54 - G57) and TO (D number 0 - 819) after POWER On are defined in NC MD 140* and 142*. With these values it is possible to determine the state of the control (in terms of ZO and TO) after Power On.
a a aa aa a aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a aa aa aa a a aa aa aa aaaa aa a a aa aa aa aa aa aa a a aaa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a aa aa aaaa a aaa aa aa aa aa aa aa aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaa a 1 Input Output Output Output 6–36 a aaaa a aaa
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 200* Active on Power On 1st measuring system connection (as from SW 3) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units +0 15021015 (up to SW 4) 30021030 (as from SW 5) – 0 Digit No.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 204* 03.95 Active on NC Stop Coarse stop tolerance range Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 40 +0 16 000 units (MS) 40 +0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) The value defining the ”Coarse stop tolerance range ”can be higher than that defining the ”Fine stop tolerance range”. Consequently, a block change to the next machining block will be initiated correspondingly sooner.
03.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 208* Active on NC Stop Fine stop tolerance range Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 10 +0 16 000 units (MS) 10 +0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) A traversing movement is completed when the axis has reached the setpoint position + - the entered exact stop limit fine. Corrective action: e.g. drift compensation (see Section entitled ”Axis (Analog) and Spindle Installation”).
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 212* 03.95 Active on NC Stop Zero-speed monitoring Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 16 000 units (MS) 100 0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Fine exact stop Negative axis direction SET POSITION Positive axis direction Coarse exact stop ACTUAL POSITION Zero-speed monitoring The NC monitors the position at zero speed (holding of position).
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 220* Active on NC Stop Backlash compensation 1st measuring system Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 –16 000 16 000 units (MS) In the case of axes with indirect measuring systems, mechanical backlash results in corruption of the traversing path. When the direction is reversed, traverse is either shortened or extended by the amount of backlash, depending on the design.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 10.94 The software limit switches cannot fulfil their function correctly until the reference point has been approached and NC MD 560 * 5 has been set to "1". The software limit switches are always approached at the speed defined in NC MD 1 unless a lower speed was selected in the current motion block.
a aa a aa aa a a a a a a aa aa aa 240* M M W R XMR ZMR ... ... ... ... ...
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 244* 10.94 Active on NC Stop Reference point shift Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 - 99 999 999 99 999 999 units (MS) Reference point shift is used to shift the reference points of the measuring system. Instead of mechanical shifting or rotating of the measuring equipment (and thus of the "deceleration" cam), the reference point can be shifted electrically by up to ±9 999 units.
a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 252* Default value 1 666 09.95 Active on NC Stop Kv factor Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 10 000 80 000 (as from SW 5) 0.01 s-1 When specifying the KV factor, attention must be paid to the fact that the gain factor for the entire position control loop is dependent on other controlled system parameters.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 260* Scaling factor maximum speed setpoint Active for all channels of mode groups in STOP Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 8 000 1) 10 000 2) 9 000 3) 1 0 1 99 999 999 20 000 20 000 0.01 % of max. setpoint Active: for all channels of mode group in stop The multgain factor is used to match the controlled system to the KV factor specified in NC MD 252*.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 268* 09.95 Active on NC Stop Maximum setpoint speed (IPO stop) Default value 1) 8 192 10 000 2) 10 000 3) Lower input limit +0 0 0 Upper input limit Units 8 192 20 000 20 000 VELO 0.01 % of max. motor speed This entry defines the maximum voltage value to be output as setpoint speed. This value depends on the setpoint limiting values, if any, in the speed controller (normally 10 V).
09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 276* Active on NC Stop Acceleration Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit +0 16 000 (SW 3) 9999 9999 (as from SW 4) 99 000 000 (as from SW 4.4) 50 Units 10 000 units ––––– S2 V [m/min] Rapid traverse V max Identical slope t [s] 0 The acceleration values for the axes need not be identical. The control assumes the lowest acceleration value of the interpolating axes involved.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 09.95 MD 276* is calculated as follows: Maximum speed [rev/min] . 360 degrees/input resolution MD 276* = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 60 x run-up time [sec] . 10000 Example: Maximum speed: 1000 rev/min Measured value: 200 msec Reserve: 100 msec C axis input resolution: 0.01 degrees 2000 rev. . 360 degrees . 100 MD 276* = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– = 400 [ units IS . 10000 / s2 ] . 100 60 sec. .
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 288* Active on NC Stop Jog feedrate Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 000 +0 99 999 000 1 000 units/min (IS) The specified value applies to travel in JOG mode with the feedrate override switch set to 100%. The value in NC MD 288* must not exceed the maximum feedrate (NC MD 280*).
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 304* 09.95 Active in next block Interpolation parameter name Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see table +0 3 – Default values 840C (T) 840C (M) 3040 1 1 3041 3 2 3042 0 3 3043 . . 3069 0 . . 0 0 . .
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 308* Active on Power On Limiting frequency C axis encoder Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 16 000 kHz The limiting frequency of the C axis actual value encoder is entered in machine data 308*. The limiting frequency can be taken from the encoder manufacturer's specifications. Pulses from the encoder may be lost when the limiting frequency is exceeded.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 09.95 The NC activates leadscrew error compensation (SSFK) after reaching the reference point. The CNC must therefore be informed via MD 316* as to which of the 1000 possible compensation points represents the reference point for the axis in question.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 336* Active on Power On Contour threshold speed Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 5 +0 1 000 000 1 000 units/min (IS) NC MD 336* is used to define the speed at which the contour monitor is to be activated. At speeds below this axis-specific threshold speed, the contour monitor remains inactive.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 364* 09.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) The following parameters are used for adaption to the measuring system: Parameter Symbol MD Meaning Position control resolution b 1800* Internal computational resolution of the (Bit 0-3) control Multiplier for EXE f (signifies e.g.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) • 12.93 The ROD encoder is mounted onto the motor and the gearing is located between the motor and the leadscrew: m= I ×r 4p Example 1: I = 0.2 inch; p = 1000; b = 2 × 10-5 inch; r = 1:2 (i.e. 2 motor revolutions for 1 leadscrew revolution); m= 0.
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa • v b l p v f m m= = u = MD MD MD = = = = = = m= f= m= MD MD MD = 4xpxm 10 mm 4 x 2048 x
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 372* 07.97 Active on Reset Delay time zero speed monitoring Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 1 000 ms NC MD 372* is used to specify the amount of time that is to elapse before zero speed monitoring (NC MD 212*) is to be activated during the approach to position (set speed=0). The time must be chosen so as to enable suppression of the largest possible following error.
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 384* Active on Power On Setpoint output (up to SW 2) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 05120000 – Digit No.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 384* 07.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 3840,6-7 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0 0 30 388* Active on Drive/servo loop module No. Units Active on All chan. of mode gr. in STOP Weighting factor for path conversion Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 99 999 999 – Hammering or kneading machines are used for manufacturing axially symmetrical parts using a forming process.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 392* 09.95 Active – Time constant symmetrizing filter Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 1 000 0.1 ms In order to avoid axis overshooting when working with feedforward control, the set part position is fed to the position controller with a time delay. This delay is set with this machine data. Input value: =0 0 Static feedforward control (e.g.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 400* Active on Power On Measuring system connection Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 05031000 15021015 (up to SW 4) 30021015 (as from SW 5) – The spindles available on the machine can be allocated to the measuring circuit modules in a flexible way.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 09.95 in NC MD 403* and 0 in NC MD 404* to 410*. In the case of gear units with fewer than eight gears, 0 should be entered for the non-existing gears (a value other than 0 for a non-existent gear will cause the spindle to come to standstill). Gear input signals (see Interface Description Part 2). Note: Gear stages not used must be assigned the value zero.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Voltage MD 403* MD 404* MD 405* [volts] Umax 10 MD 448* Speed [rev/min] MD 411* MD 413* MD 412* If 3rd gear has been engaged, the new S value must be lower than the contents of MD 413* in order for the NC to initiate a gear change.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 09.95 • You can set MD 419* to 426* so that the motor is accelerated to the current limit for a certain time. If a ramp-up generator is built into the actuator, you can set MD 419* to 426* to 0. In this case, the setpoint changes in steps on acceleration and deceleration. • You must set MD 478* to 485* so that the motor can always follow the setpoint without reaching the current limit.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) On an oriented spindle stop (M19), the spindle is included in the position control loop. The gain factor is defined by the steepness of the approach to the cutoff position. If "0" is entered, the position controller loop is broken.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 09.95 Example • • S value: 1000 rev/min Tolerance in MD: 3% The permissible actual speed range is from 970 rev/min to 1030 rev/min.
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 448* Minimum motor setpoint speed Active on NC Stop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 +0 16 000 rev/min1) NC MD 448* defines the minimum spindle speed. The motor does not fall below this speed, for example, even when the cutting speed is constant and the turning diameter increases.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 452* 10.94 Active on NC Stop Spindle position for external M19 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 35 999 0.01° If M19 is started by the PLC via the "Position spindle" and "PLC spindle control" signals, the NC positions the spindle to the angle specified in NC MD 452*.
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) The parameters for defining MD 455* and 456* can be taken from the table below.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) • 09.95 Encoder mounted to the spindle via the measuring gear; SIPOS unconditioned signal encoder and HMS servo loop module b = 0.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Notes • Machine data 458* is taken into account only when a HMS servo loop module is used. This MD also has an effect when the measuring system of the digital drive (611-D) is used. • The multiplication factor must be taken into account for variable increment weighting (MD 455*, 456*).
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Digit No. Example showing the structure of a value in MD 460* 09.95 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 Servo loop module number No. of servo loop connection Always 0 for analog module Structure of MD 460* Meaning of the individual terms Digit No. 7, 6 The servo loop module number is the number of the module on the servo local bus. The modules are numbered from left to right in ascending order.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 461* Active on Power On Allocated C axis Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 – MD 461* defines which global axis number is used to operate the spindle when it works as C axis. This determines, for instance, which axis-specific machine data block is used. If the value 0 is entered in MD 461, the spindle cannot be used as a C axis.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 09.95 To activate feedforward control set option (6FC5 150-0AS02-0AA0). 1) The feedforward control factor is adapted to the machine stability and the resulting acceleration/deceleration of the spindle. The degree to which the following error is reduced depends on the feedforward factor. A factor of 1000 reduces the following error almost to zero in the stationary state. However, this setting will cause overshooting.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Input value: =0 static feedforward control (e.g. for AC drives with rise timeposition control scan time) The time constant for setpoint smoothing is only injected into the setpoint branch when feedforward control (option) is active.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 09.95 Acceleration time constant with position controller gears 1-8 478*-485* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 2 000 0 50 000 Active on Power On 1 ms Assignments Gear 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NC MD 478* 479* 480* 481* 482* 483* 484* 485* The control issues the ramp-form setpoints for acceleration and braking operations (ramp function generator).
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) The set acceleration must not exceed the available acceleration reserves of the drive in position control mode as this will result in large system deviations which are too high and which will cause the drive to come to a standstill (with alarms 156*, 116*, 2014*).
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 489* 04.96 Active on Reset D component compensatory controller 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 1 These machine data are only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox". Together with the built-in test function (activated with NC MD 525*, bit 5), these machine data can be used to set the control response of the PID compensatory controller.
04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 493* Active on Reset Emergency retraction threshold 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 16 000 99999999 (SW5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) 400 This machine data is only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox".
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 09.95 Effect of the input values (different cases): 0: No controlled follow-up; immediate normal follow-up 1...
a a aaa a a a aaa a aa a a a aa a a a a a a aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
04.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 5 12.93 When bit 5 is set, the interpolation parameters (I, J, K) can be programmed either as absolutes (G90) or as increments (G91) in the block (also see NC MD 5007, bit 5). The interpolation parameters for contour definitions (blueprint programming) must always be specified incrementally (G91), regardless of whether bit 5 is set or not.
08.96 Bit 4 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) When bit 4 is set, the polar coordinate angles (G10, G11, G12, G13) can be programmed as either absolutes (G90) or increments (G91) in the block (also see NC MD 5007, bit 5).
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 2 01.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 4 Keyswitch lock for input disable GI Bit 4=1 Keyswitch setting=0: not possible to program gear interpolation (ELG) via input display. Keyswitch setting 0: programming of gear interpolation (ELG) via input display possible. Bit 4=0 Keyswitch locking not possible.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 09.01 Note: If the MD bit is not set, the last function to be programmed in the block is active.
07.97 Bit 1 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NS SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 1 = 0 All zero point offsets are deselected with G53 (G54-G59 + ext. ZO). Bit 1 = 1 G53 has same effect as @706, all zero offsets (G54-G59 + ext. ZO), DRF and PRESET are deselected with G53 or with @706. Tool offset (TO) is not deselected.
09.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 07.97 Bit 6 Bit 6=1 An extended tool parameter basic display with 12 parameters (P0 ...P11) is displayed. MD 13, "Number of parameter values per D no.", is monitored for greater than, equal to 12 on Power On and Format tool offset memory. Bit 6=0 The existing tool parameter basic display with 10 parameters (P0 ... P9) is displayed.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 07.97 Bit 2 This bit indicates whether the programmed address extension or the M and S address extension automatically generated by the control is to be transferred to the PLC interface (in the control, the address extension is always in force, except for emergency retraction). This bit can be set if the control has more than one spindle. (The extended M function must be decoded with DB80/DB30).
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
09.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
07.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa MDA X1 X3 X5 X7 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Menu MDA initial menu channel 1 aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Two bits are assigned to every coupled axis pairing in every coupled axis combination. Leading axis 898 896 894 892 890 888 886 884 882 880 878 876 NC MD Coupl. mot. axis Definition of the coupled axis pairing 899 897 895 893 891 889 887 885 883 881 879 877 NC MD Bit Bit 7 a. 6 5 a. 4 3 a. 2 1 a. 0 7 a. 6 5 a. 4 Bit 3 a. 2 1 a. 0 7 a. 6 5 a. 4 3 a. 2 1 a.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 09.01 The function ”Automatic saving of part programs on hard disk” can be activated with no/yes in the machine area ”Automatic” via program modification and toggle field ”Automatic save”. Activation of the function ”Automatic saving of part programs on hard disk” is indicated by displaying of the text ”SAV” in the editor status line of the NCK editor.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 01.
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Bit 2 Bit 2=1 Must be set when a function calling for a spindle encoder is required, e.g. • • • • • G33/34/35 G 95 G 96 G 97 M 19 (Thread cutting) (Feedrate per revolution) (Constant cutting speed) (Freeze spindle speed) (Oriented spindle stop) The encoder is allocated in MD 400*, which also activates the hardware monitor for the measuring circuits.
07.
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Bit 3 If the bit is set, no measuring circuit monitoring is performed. Examples for measuring circuit monitoring: • Check for encoder line breakage • Check for contamination, if the encoder has a signal for contamination or if the amplitude can be monitored (with unconditioned signal encoders). Active: Immediately Bit 2 Bit 2=1 The spindle is switched to C axis mode on Power On.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) • 04.96 Control mode The last drift compensation value to be derived is also maintained in control mode (M3/M4/M5). • C axis mode The NC axis drift machine data MD 272* applies here; the compensation calculated by the function ”Automatic drift compensation with M19” has no effect here. Note: • If the M19 area is deselected the derived compensation value remains active.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Bit 2=1 The control ignores multiple assignment of different spindles to the same digital setpoint output on runup. The control checks cyclically that the spindles do not access the setpoint output at the same time. If they do, reset alarm 2016, "Multiple assignment of connection" is triggered.
a a a a a a a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa
07.
aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 09.95 These bits only affect following spindles and are active immediately Bit 0-7 Switchover bit for emergency retraction Bit 0-7=1 The corresponding bit in the output byte of the mixed I/O module is switched from the normal state to the inverted state when an emergency retraction has been triggered by this axis/spindle.
a a aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.
12.93 Bit 0 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) Bit 0 = 0 Inhibits auxiliary function output to the PLC Auxiliary functions are: M, S, T, H, D. Use is recommended for computational channels. For output of the programmed F value to the PLC, see NC MD 544*, bit 0. Note: In machining channels bit 0 must always be "1".
aaa a a aaa aaa a aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) Bit patterns for bits...
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) With SINUMERIK 840C, the initial plane is defined in NC MD 110*. In NC MDs 548*, 550* and 552* you define to which axes the radius compensation and/or length compensation is to apply when the NC is switched on. In NC MD 548* and 550* you define the axes to which the radius compensation is to apply in the default setting, i.e. when the NC is switched on.
a a aaaaaa aaa aaa aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 08.
08.96 Bit 4 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) The program can be started with NC START without approach to the reference point of this axis. Bit 3 of NC MD 5004 can be used to indicate whether reference point approach is required prior to program start; this bit applies to all axes and channels.
08.
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) Bit 3 The actual value (actual position display) is converted into division positions. A division position < 1 is not possible (applies to both rotary and linear axes). The actual value display in the Service data is not converted into division positions.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 12.93 The axis name must be defined according to the table.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) Bit 4 12.93 Bit 4=1 To set a traversing path and direction with G90 programming which corresponds to the program. The control behaves according to the G function programmed: G91: No modulo 360° calculation. The current ZO and TO are added to the programmed position (more than 360° also possible) which results in a new position and a new direction of movement.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
09.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.5 Leadscrew error compensation bits (compensation flags) MD No.
a a aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a aaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 6.7 09.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1108* Division reference dimension Active at once Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 units (MS) Note: The rotary axis has a defaulted internal reference dimension of 360 degrees in accordance with the input resolution. No input is necessary.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1116* 09.95 f: Pulse multiplication EXE/611D/HMS 1st measuring system Default value 1 Lower input limit Upper input limit 128 512 1 Active on Power On Warm restart Units 1) 2) – MD 1116* is used to set the multiplication factor for the actual position pulses when using the 6FX 1145-6B... HMS measuring-circuit module.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1144* Active on NC Stop Switch over current setpoint 1) Default value Lower input limit 60 60 1 2) Upper input limit Units 999 0.1 % of max. current setpoint Move against fixed stop Current setpoint which is to take effect as soon as speed control mode switches to current control mode. The percentage that has to be entered refers to the max.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1184*1196* 04.96 Active on NC Stop Feedforward control factor 4th - 7th parameter set 3) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 1 000 0.1% This MD has the same meaning as MD 312*, see also functional description of parameter set switchover.
09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) u: Impulses variable incremental weighting 2nd measuring system 1) 1208* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 65000 1) 9999 9999 2) – 1 Active: Active on Power On After Power On Applies to feed axes only. See MD 364*, 368*.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1224* 09.95 Active on NC Stop Servo enable switch-off delay Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 1 000 ms The speed enable (servo enable) on the servo loop is revoked after the set delay time has elapsed. The servo enable is available on the servo loop once per axis/spindle and is allocated by the control on a mode group specific basis. Action of the time delay entered: 1.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Compensation time constant quadrant error compensation (SW 2 and SW 3) 1236* Active on NC Stop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 0.1 ms 1236* Active on NC Stop 1st compensation time constant 3) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 150 0 16 000 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) 0.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 04.96 Filter time constant acceleration determination for quadrant error compensation (as from SW 4) 1256* Active on NC Stop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 60 0 16 000 1 ms This value is usually not altered by the user. The value should only be increased if the compensation in the smallest speed range is insufficient.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Following error threshold for detecting the fixed stop (as from SW 3) 1280* Active on NC Stop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 0 16 000 units (MS) 1 000 0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Following error increase threshold for detecting the fixed stop. This machine data is only active when MD 1804* bit 4 = 0.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1292* 09.95 Active on NC Stop Motor current on equilibration (as from SW 3) Default value Lower input limit -70 -700 (as from SW 4) 0 Upper input limit Units 70 700 (as from SW 4) 0.1 % of the power section current MD 1292* is used to define the value of an additional torque of a motor used to compensate for stationary loads (e.g.
01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1312* Active on NC Stop Servo gain factor 5th parameter set (as from SW 4) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 10 000 80 000 (as from SW 5) 0.01s-1 1 666 These MD have the same meaning as MD 252*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switchover”.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1328* 09.95 Active on NC Stop Servo gain factor 7th parameter set (as from SW 4) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 10 000 80 000 (as from SW 5) 0.01s-1 1 666 These MD have the same meaning as MD 252*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switchover”.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Torque distribution torque compensation controller (SW 4.4 and higher) 1344* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 500 0 984 Active on NC Stop Units ‰ With MD 1344*, the input variables of the torque compensation controller are weighted to permit a parameterizable torque distribution over both drives according to the respective moments of inertia.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1372* 09.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Measuring circuit assignment 2nd measuring system (as from SW 2) 1388* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 5030000 analog (as from SW 2) 15021000 (as from SW 3) 30021000 (as from SW 5) – 0 Active: Active on Power On After POWER ON. Only applies to feed axes. The second measuring system is defined in the same way as the first measuring system with MD 200*.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1428* 04.96 Active on NC Stop D component compensatory controller Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 1 These machine data are only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox". Together with the installed test function (activated with NC MD 1844* bit 5), these machine data are used to set the control behaviour of the PID compensatory controller.
04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1440* Active on NC Stop Tolerance range synchronism coarse Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 16 000 99999999 (SW 5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) 100 This machine data is only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox".
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 09.95 If the calculated setpoint speed/setpoint acceleration of the following axis is greater than the defined values, the corresponding interface signals are set at the PLC interface. If, for example, 50 is entered in MD 276* as the acceleration value, interface signal ”ACCELERATION WARNING THRESHOLD REACHED” is set if 45 is exceeded in the standard setting.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Application: A gearbox grouping can be configured with the G401 command. If the type of link has not been defined in the G401 command, the default value from MD 1456* is taken. Example: G401 X Y X, Y: leading axes, Z: following axis, no link type. Z If "No default" (MD 1456* = 0) has been entered and no link type has been entered in G401, reset alarm "GI CONFIGURATION illegal" is triggered.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1568*1592* 09.95 Active on NC Stop Exact stop limit fine 2nd - 8th parameter set Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 +0 16 000 units (MS) 10 +0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) These MD have the same meaning as MD 208*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switchover”.
01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 1708*1732* Time constant parallel model 2nd - 8th parameter set (as from SW 4) Active on RESET Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 6 000 0 16 000 0.01 ms These MD have the same meaning as MD 1432*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switchover”.These machine data are only active with gearbox interpolation.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 09.01 The derived following error difference is always evaluated against the actual set speed in order to derive a compensation value across the total velocity range of an axis. Otherwise a compensation proportional to the velocity would not be possible if constant velocity operation is revoked. The compensation values are deleted when compensation is deselected (MD 1804*, bit 1 deleted).
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Description of function: The absolute position is made up of • 16 bits absolute revolution information (number of revolutions), • 14 bits resolution within one revolution, • 7 bits fine resolution, i.e. that 216 = 65536 encoder resolutions can be displayed with a resolution of max. 14+7 bits. The encoder has 2500 encoder lines, i.e.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
09.95 Bit 4 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Bit 4=1 Measuring system with distance-coded reference marks. Standard value: Bit 0-4 = 0 Changes in bits 2-3 are actuated on the next reference point approach in bit 4 after POWER ON.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 04.96 Special case ”parking axis” The axial interface signal ”Parking axis” also causes the interface signal ”Reference point reached” to be deleted for an axis with SIPOS/Endat absolute encoder. When bit 3 of MD 1808* is set, a new referencing is suppressed. The absolute value is not transferred until POWER ON. Note: Reference point approach can be carried out again when MD 1808* bit 3 is deleted.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Bit 6 Torque compensation controller output affects master Bit 6=1 The output of the torque compensation controller is connected with bits 5 and 6.
09.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.
01.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.
07.
aaa a a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 07.97 The following bits are defined for the following axes. They are then active for the following axis and the leading axes activated in the GI grouping. The above values are included when calculating the synchronous position (G403).
09.95 6.8 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.8 MDs for multi-channel display MDs for multi-channel display MDs for screen 2044020419 Multiple-channel display Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0 0 4 (as from SW 4: 6) Active on Warm restart – Reserved for customer UMS. 2042020439 Multiple-channel display Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0 0 4 (as from SW 4: 6) Active on Warm restart – Reserved for system UMS.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 6.9 09.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 2430*2433* Zero mark correction + as from SW 4 5th to 8th parameter set Active on NC Stop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 - 999 999 999 999 16 000 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) 2434*2441* Zero mark correction - as from SW 4 1st to 8 th parameter set Active on NC Stop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 - 999 999 16 000 (as from SW 4.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 09.95 MDs for acceleration characteristic for spindles 2471*2478* Speed lim. acc. adapt. as from SW 4 1st to 8th parameter set Active on NC Stop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 99 999 +0 99 999 rpm/or 0.
04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 2508*2514* Active on RESET D component comp. contr. 2nd - 8th par. set as from SW 4 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 1 These MD have the same meaning as MD 489*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switchover”. 2515*2521* Time constant parallel model 2nd - 8th par.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 2560*2566* Default value 04.96 Emergency retraction threshold 2nd - 8th parameter as from SW 4 Active on RESET Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 16 000 99 999 999 (SW5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) 400 These MD have the same meaning as MD 493*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switchover”. 2567*2574* Time const. speed link path 1st to 8th par.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 2702* Torque distr. torque comp. controller 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 500 0 984 Active on Power On Units ‰ With MD 2702*, the input variables of the torque compensation controller are weighted to permit a parameterizable torque distribution over both drives according to the respective moments of inertia.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 3032*3060* 09.95 Active on Power On Number of teeth motor 2) 1st par. set to 8th par. set Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 999 999 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) – 3064*3092* Active on Power On Number of teeth spindle 2) 1st par. set to 8th par. set Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 999 999 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.
09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 3216*3240* Default value Tol. band for synchr. "fine" 2nd - 8th parameter set as from SW 4 Active on RESET Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 16 000 99 999 999 (SW 5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) 40 These MD have the same meaning as MD 1436*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switchover”. 3244*3268* Default value Tol. band for synchr.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 3392*3416* 01.99 Active on NC Stop Maximum velocity (as from SW 6) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0 0 10 000 Units See also Functional Descriptions: Collision monitoring. 3420* Active at once Compensation time constant for contour monitoring (from SW 6.3) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 600 0.
07.97 6.9.1 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring MDs for collision monitoring 3800* Motion axis X coordinate (as from SW 6) POWER ON Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 Axis no. The motion axes are assigned to the protection zone in the protection-zone-specific machine data. 3804* Motion axis Y coordinate (as from SW 6) POWER ON Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 Axis no.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring 07.
01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring Protection dimensions in 3 coordinates not equal to 0: Three-dimensional monitoring Definition: Two-dimensional protection zone to be mutually monitored for collision must be in the same plane.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring MD No. 3880* (as from SW 6) MD No. 3884* (as from SW 6) MD No. 3888* (as from SW 6) MD No. 3892* (as from SW 6) 07.97 Bit No.
04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring 3900* r1: Load no. of revolutions 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Active Units 1 3904* r2: Motor no.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring 07.97 The setpoint position of the following axis is checked in every IPO cycle to establish whether it is in the reduction range. The system is designed such that several IPO cycles elapse before changes to the setpoints of a leading axis are output to the setpoint controller of the following axis. To compensate this deadtime, the setpoint position is corrected by the predicted path.
07.97 6.10 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration MDs for flexible memory configuration 60000 Size of UMS memory Default value Active after SK "Reconfigure memory" 1) Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 960 or 2 760 KB 2 760 KB (as from SW 4.4) 4 KB/8 KB 256 KB With the introduction of this MD it is no longer necessary to define the UMS size in the configuration file in the MMC master control.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration 60003 01.99 Load MS drive software (as from SW 6) POWER ON Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 – If MD 60003 and/or 60004 are set to 1 the memory for the drive software is automatically set to 192/384 Kbytes (compatible memory requirement). The memory size can also be altered by changing MD 60014 (toggling).
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration 60006 Number of parameters per tool as from SW 4 Active after SK "Reconfigure memory" Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 0 10 32 1 TO 819 tools with 10 parameters each corresponds to 32760 bytes = approx. 32 KB memory. The upper input limit depends on the NCK memory capacity (4 or 8 MB memory).
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration 60011 07.97 Active after SK "Reconfigure memory" Memory configuration of NC module as from SW 4 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 Byte Machine data reserved by the system. 60012 Active At once Load cap. of NC CPU (as from SW 5) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 - 100 % This machine data is used simply to indicate the CPU loading.
08.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration 61020 Active Power On Memory for extended overstore (channel 1) (as from SW 5) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 0 1 approx. 50 KB 61021 Active Power On Memory for extended overstore (channel 2) (as from SW 5) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 0 1 approx.
a aaaa aaa a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a
07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 6.12 Setting data 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) All setting data (SD) take effect immediately (without POWER ON). If program processing is in progress, they become active in the next block if they have been changed with G functions in the part program. Breakdown of NC setting data SD No. SD No. SD No. SD No. SD No. SD No. SD No. SD No. SD No.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 12.
08.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) R parameters 700 parameters per channel are available for the whole system and 600 central parameters: parameters R0 to R699 are channel-specific, parameters R700 to R1299 apply to all channels.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 09.95 R parameter assignment R0 – R49: Typical application per channel: Input of cycles and subroutines. R50 – R99: Typical application per channel: For calculations within cycles and subroutines. The same local parameters may be used for nested subroutines. When cycles or subroutines are called with @ 040 to 043, an R parameter stack saves the data used so far and stores them after return to the calling program.
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) General setting data 0 Active on – Dry run feedrate Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1072 0000 9999 9999 (as from SW 5) 1 000 units/min If ”Dry run feedrate” is selected on the control, the tool path feedrate selected is the dry run feedrate (mm/min (G94)) and not the programmed feedrate. 1 Active on – Dyn.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 12.93 M version: If the control is initialized for milling, the actual value coupling between the spindle speed actual value and feed setpoint is direction dependent. If the traversing direction of the feed axis is to be altered, then the spindle direction of rotation (M3-->M4) must also be altered. Additionally, the overflow when the spindle is reversed (e.g.
09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 9 Active on – INC Variable Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 9 999.9999 1) 16 000 2) – 50 Incremental dimension INC Variable The axis in question is traversed by this amount when the direction key (+ or -) is pressed. 200* Active on – Scale factor Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 0.00001 99.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 08.96 The setting data can be written from a part program under "Program control" using the command @410 or from the PLC. A larger value can be written as the available block memory. The NC however still predecodes no more than the stated number of blocks. If the setting data is reduced when already more than the defined number of blocks has been predecoded, no more blocks are predecoded until this number is reached.
12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 312* Active on – Scale centre NC Default value Lower input limit 0 – 99 999.999 Upper input limit + 99 999.999 Units mm or inches The scale centre defines where the reference point for the alteration of the programmed axis positions using the scale factor lies (see Programming Guide for detailed description). The scale centre is programmed together with G51 in the block.
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 07.97 Spindle-specific setting data 401* Active on – Programmable spindle speed limitation for G96 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 0.1 rev/min The spindle speed is limited at constant cutting speed (G96) by the programmed spindle speed limitation. The setting data can be modified in the program using the command G92.
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa
6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 01.99 Setting data for the additive protection zone adaptation (as from SW 6) The values for the coordination of the dynamic protection zone adaptation are to be entered in the following setting data bits: SD No.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1 611A main spindle drive machine data (MSD MD) (SW 3) 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1 611A main spindle drive machine data (MSD MD) (SW 3) 7.1.1 MSD MD input (SW 3) The main spindle drive machine data are provided for the purpose of matching the main spindle drives and the machine tool.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 6 12.93 Active at once DC link voltage Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – V Display machine data for the present DC link voltage. 7 Active at once Motor current Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – A Display machine data for the present motor current RMS value.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 11 Status of binary inputs Active at once Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – Hex Display machine data for the status of the binary inputs.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 19 10.94 Active at once Rounding degree speed setpoint Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 – Input of parameter setting for a PT2 filter (low-pass) in the speed setpoint channel. The lowpass filter is inserted on the output side of the ramp-function generator and is effective only if the speed setpoint smoothing function (MD 53, bit 4) is activated at the same time.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 23 Active at once nx for nact < nx message motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 Maximum motor speed rev/min 6 000 Input of response value for monitoring of the PLC status message nact < nx (see also MD 241).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 32 12.93 Active at once Integral-action time speed controller motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 20 5 6 000 ms Input of integral-action time (tN) for the speed controller. The speed controller has a PI function which can be set separately for eight gear stages. Note: A speed controller adaptation can be implemented only for gear stage 1 (see MD 203).
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 38 Active at once Hysteresis MD 37 motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 50 0 500 rev/min Input of hysteresis for machine data MD 37 (switchover speed for motor encoder evaluation).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 43 10.94 Active at once Hysteresis MD 42 motor 1 Default value 20 Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 Maximum motor speed rev/min Input of hysteresis for the switchover speed set in machine data MD 42 (see also MD 39).
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 50 Switching speed from Md1 to Md2 motor 1 Default value Active at once Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 Maximum motor speed rev/min 4 x rated motor speed Input of speed at which switchover from the 1st torque limit (MD 39) to the 2nd torque limit (MD 41) takes place.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 63 10.94 Active at once Maximum motor temperature motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 170 °C Input of maximum motor temperature. The value entered can be lower than the maximum temperature value calculated via the motor code number (MD 96) and motor data set.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 73 Active at once Shift factor DAC2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 15 – Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. The DACs are configured in the course of the drive servo start-up procedure for diagnostic purposes. Input of shift factor DAC2 for analog output. The top 8 bits from a 16-bit wide memory location are output.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 10.94 Input of shift factor DAC1 for analog output. The top 8 bits from a 16-bit wide memory location are output. This machine data specifies how often the value must be shifted to the left beforehand. A shift by one position corresponds to a multiplication by 2, i.e. the shift factor allows multiplication by the power of two 2shift factor.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 96 Active on Power On Motor code number motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 101 99 332 – Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. During start-up in machine data dialog, the machine data is set or altered as appropriate via the configuration setting. Input of code number for the motor used.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Order No. 12.93 Rated speed Rated power Rated current No-load current nrated in rev/min Prated in kW in A (for T =100 K) 0 in A (for T =100 K) 1PH6163-4NF0- x 1500 30.0 72.5 33.3 125 1PH6163-4NF4- x 1500 30.0 86.0 40.3 126 1PH6163-4NG4- x 2000 38.0 84.0 37.5 127 1PH6167-4NF0- x 1500 37.0 79.6 36.3 128 1PH6167-4NF4- x 1500 33.0 95.7 43.5 129 1PH6167-4NG4- x 2000 45.0 91.0 41.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Order No. Rated speed Rated power Rated current No-load current nrated in rev/min Prated in kW in A (for T =100 K) 0 in A (for T =100 K) 1PH6206-4NB8- D 1250 32.0 73.0 49.0 211 DMR160.80.6. RIF 200 12.6 60.0 36.4 212 DMR160.80.6. rif 1300 12.6 33.3 26.0 213 1PH4103-4NF2- x 1500 7.5 25.2 11.5 300 1PH4103-4NG6- x 2000 8.5 36.4 17.7 301 1PH6105-4NF2- x 1500 11.0 36.6 16.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 12.93 97 Active at once Boot Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0002 Hex Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. During start-up in machine data dialog, the machine data is set or altered as appropriate via the configuration setting.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 104 Active at once Grading torque setpoint filter motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1.00 0.10 10.00 – Input of filter quality for the bandstop in the torque setpoint channel (see MD 117). 1.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 120 12.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 159 Motor moment of inertia motor 1 Active on Power On Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0.002 32.000 kgm2 Input of motor moment of inertia as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 96).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 165 12.93 Active on Power On Motor no-load voltage motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 500.0 V Input of motor no-load voltage as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 96).
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 171 Active on Power On Magnetizing reactance motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Depends on motor 0 65 535 Units m Input of magnetizing reactance as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 96).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 175 12.93 Active on Power On Gain factor Xh-characteristic motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 100 300 % Input of gain factor (Xh2/Xh1) of the Xh characteristic (magnetizing reactance) as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 96).
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 179 Selection min/max memory Active at once Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0002 Hex This function allows variables to be monitored in the software. The address of the monitored variable is entered in machine data "Address of monitored variable" (MD 181).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 182 10.94 Active at once Minimum value min/max memory Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 – Hex Output of minimum value of a previously defined variable (see MD 181). The value is displayed in hexadecimal format.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 189 Active at once Hysteresis monitoring 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0001 0000 FFFF Hex Input of hysteresis of threshold value 1 of address 1 to be monitored for variable relay function 1.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 195 12.93 Active at once Lower adaptation speed motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 0 (Max. speed) –2 rev/min Input of lower adaptation speed for the speed controller. The speed controller machine data can be adapted, i.e. the P gain and reset time altered as a function of speed, in gear stage 1.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 202 Active at once Reduction factor reset time motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 1 200 % Input of reset time reduction factor for the upper adaptation speed. This machine data contains the multiplication factor for the reset time characteristic (see diagram MD 203).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 206 12.93 Active at once Selection transient recorder Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0001 Hex This machine data is provided to activate the transient recorder function with which two signals can be recorded in a 1 ms cycle for a limited time period.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 210 Active at once Address for stop condition Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Input of address for the variable which is significant for stopping the recording (see also MD 206).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 216 12.93 Active at once Shift factor signal 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 15 – Input of shift factor for signal 2 (see also MD 206). The top 8 bits from a 16-bit wide memory location are output. This machine data specifies how often the value must be shifted to the left beforehand.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 222 Active on Power On Motor rated voltage motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 500.0 V Input of motor rated voltage as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 238).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 228 12.93 Active on Power On Rotor resistance cold motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Depends on motor 0 32 767 Units m Input of rotor resistance (cold) as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 238).
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 233 Speed at start of field weakening motor 2 Active on Power On Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 100 6 000 rev/min Input of speed at which field weakening starts as specified on the motor data sheet (nonSiemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 238).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 238 10.94 Active on Power On Motor code number motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 101 99 332 – Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. During start-up in machine data dialog, the machine data is set or altered as appropriate via the configuration setting. Input of code number for the motor used.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Description of user-programmable messages: • | nact | < nmin (function no. 1) The PLC status message is set when | nact | < nmin. Settable in MD 21. • Ramp-up complete (function no. 2) The PLC status message is set when the actual speed value corresponds to the setpoint, allowing for the tolerance band set in MD 27. This status message is not output when the speed fluctuates as a result of load changes.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 242 10.94 Active at once Programmable message 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 1 20 – A function can be assigned to programmable message 2 in this machine data. The default setting corresponds to Md > Mdx (see MD 241 for other settings).
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 247 Active at once Control word message Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex By setting bits 0 to 5, it is possible to invert the function of the appropriate messages (MD 241 to MD 246). In bits 8 and 9, it is possible to choose between sign-specific or absolute-valuebased interrogation of the memory address limit values (MD 185, MD 190).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 255 10.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 260 Active at once nmin for nact < nmin message motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 12 0 Rated speed rev/min Input of response value for monitoring of the PLC status message nact < nmin (see also MD 241).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 265 12.93 Active at once P-gain speed controller motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 32.0 1.0 120.0 – Input of P gain (Kp) for the speed controller. The speed controller has a PI function which can be set separately for eight gear stages. Note: A speed controller adaptation can be implemented only for gear stage 1 (see MD 293).
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) With a setting of, for example, 100 %, the rated torque acts as the torque limit up to rated speed. At speeds above the rated value, the torque limit curve drops in proportion to 1/n so that the rated output is reached in each case. MD 270 - MD 273, MD 47 and MD 290 are the corresponding machine data.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 275 12.93 Active at once Hysteresis MD 274 motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 50 0 Rated speed rev/min Input of hysteresis for the cut-in speed set in machine data MD 274. 276 Active at once Frequency torque setpoint filter motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 300 50 450 Hz Input of filter frequency.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 281 Active at once Type torque setpoint filter motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0001 Hex The filter type is selected in this machine data (see MD 280). 0: Bandstop characteristic 1: Low-pass characteristic 283 Active at once Lower adaptation speed motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 0 (max.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 288 10.94 Active at once Integral-action time upper adaptation speed motor 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 80 5 6 000 ms Input of integral-action time for the upper adaptation speed. This machine data contains the integral-action time at speeds above the value set in MD 284 (see diagram MD 203).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa 10.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) 313 10.94 Active at once Selection I/f control Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 Hex The I/f control diagnosis aid is activated by entering bit 0 = 1. This control is used to check encoder faults. A variable speed (without encoder evaluation) can be specified via MD 311 (current) and MD 312 (frequency).
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2 611D feed drive machine data (FDD MD) (SW 3) 7.2 611D feed drive machine data (SW 3) 7.2.1 FDD MD input (SW 3) The feed drive machine data are provided for the purpose of matching the feed drives and the machine tool. If no setting values are specified by the machine manufacturer or the user, then they must be carefully determined and optimized by the start-up engineer.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1002 12.93 Active on Power On Monitoring cycle Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 000 4 000 100 000 µs The interrupt clock cycle is used for high-priority monitoring purposes. Note: The input value for the clock cycle must be a whole multiple of 4 ms (parameterization error). m x 4000 µs m=1, 2, 3, ..., 25 Note: The interrupt level must not be exceeded otherwise the drive will be tripped.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) fPBM in Hz TPBM in µs 2666.6.... 375.0* 2782.6.... 2909.0.... 359.375 343.75 3047.6.... 328.125 3200 3368.4.... 312.5* 296.875 3555.5.... 281.25 3764.7.... 265.625 4000 250.0* 4266.6.... 4571.4.... 234.375 218.75 4923.0.... 203.125 5333.3.... 5818.1.... 187.5* 171.875 6400 156.25 7111.1.... 8000 140.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1102 12.93 Active on Power On Motor code number Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 65 535 – Input of motor order number (machine-readable product designation for Siemens motors). This number is transferred to the drive in the form of a motor code number. The user does not need to input a value (see also MD 1106).
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Order No. Rated speed Motor code no. Order No. nrated in rev/min Rated speed Motor code no.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1106 Active on Power On Power section code Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 00FF Hex When the power section order number (machine-readable product designation for Siemens power sections) is input during initial start-up, it is converted to a code number as an MMC function (the user need not enter a code number).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1108 12.93 Active on Power On Limit current power section Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 1 500 A Input of maximum thermally permissible current of power section. The input is an RMS value. This machine data is automatically parameterized for Siemens power sections by the machine data "Power section code" (MD 1106). 1110 Active on Power On Reduction factor max.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1113 Active on Power On Torque constant Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 5 0.1 5 Nm/A Input of torque constant as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). The torque constant is the quotient of rated torque : rated current (RMS) for permanent-field synchronous motors.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1120 09.95 Active at once P-gain current controller Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10 000 V/A Input of proportional gain of current controller or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). It defines the relationship between control voltage setpoint and control deviation current.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1201 Active at once Type current setpoint filter Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Low-pass Low-pass Band-stop – Input of configuration of 4 current setpoint filters. Band-stop and low-pass filters are available. The adjustable filter parameters are entered in the appropriate machine data.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 04.96 Note: • Current setpoint filter 1 is preset to the current controller sampling time MD 1000 = 125 µs for damping of the encoder torsional natural frequency. 1204 Active at once Natural frequency current setpoint filter 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 8 000 Hz Input of natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2 low-pass).
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1208 Active at once Natural frequency current setpoint filter 4 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 8 000 Hz Input of natural frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (PT2 low-pass). An entry of < 10 Hz as the natural frequency of the low-pass filter initializes the filter as a proportional element with a gain of 1 independently of the associated damping.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1211 04.96 Active at once Bandwidth current setpoint filter 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 1 000 Hz Input of 3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 1 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201. Note: When 0 is entered for the bandwidth, the filter is parameterized as a proportional element with a gain of 1.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1214 Active at once Bandwidth current setpoint filter 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 1 000 Hz Input of 3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 2 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201. Note: When 0 is entered for the bandwidth, the filter is parameterized as a proportional element with a gain of 1.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1219 04.96 Active at once Block frequency current setpoint filter 4 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 999.0 1 7 999.0 Hz Input of block frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (band-stop). When block frequencies of < 10 Hz are input, the filter is deactivated (proportional element with a gain of 1). The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Note: The velocity of a feed axis is matched with NC-MD 2560 (maximum axis velocity). The motor speed which corresponds to this maximum value must be entered in drive-MD 1401. Allowance is made for the spindle pitch plus any existing gear ratios, etc. in the relationship between NC-MD 2560 and drive-MD 1401. 1402 Active at once Reduction factor max.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 12.93 Note: Under normal circumstances, shutdown is implemented sequentially on the drive and servo sides, with variously adjustable timers (NC-MD 156, NC-MD 12240) and, in the event of a fault, only on the drive side with timer MD 1404.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1409 Integral-action time speed controller Active at once Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 0 500 ms Input of integral-action time of speed control loop in the lower speed range (N < lower speed threshold MD 1411). The integral-action times in the lower speed range (MD 1409) and the upper speed range (MD 1410) are not subject to any mutual restrictions.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 04.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1414 Active at once Natural frequency reference model speed control loop Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 8 000 Hz Input of natural frequency for the "Speed control loop" reference model. The filter is deactivated if a value of < 10 Hz is entered (proportional element with a gain of 1).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1418 12.93 Active at once nmin for nact < nmin Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 7 200 rev/min Input of threshold speed for monitoring purposes; if the actual speed value does not reach the set threshold speed in terms of absolute value, a message is transferred to the SERVO. The monitoring function is not activated unless the default value is changed.
12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1603 09.95 Active at once Timer motor temperature alarm Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 240 0 600 s Input of timer for the motor temperature alarm. When the value set in "Motor temperature warning" (MD 1602) is exceeded, a message is transferred to the SERVO and a time monitor activated.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) 1707 09.95 Active at once Speed actual value Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0.0 0000 32 767.0 rev/min This machine data is used to display the actual speed value and represents the unfiltered actual speed value. Time-synchronous unlatching (scanning) of machine data MD 1706, MD 1707 and MD 1708 is not provided.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Note: This machine data is calculated only once during ramp-up; its value cannot therefore be changed during operation. 1720 Active at once CRC diagnosis parameter Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0 FFFF Hex This machine data is used to display detected CRC errors (cyclical redundancy check).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3 611D drive machine data (FDD/MSD - as from SW 4) 07.97 7.3 611D drive machine data (FDD/MSD - as from SW 4) 7.3.1 Drive MD input (as from SW 4) The drive machine data are provided for the purpose of matching the drives (FDD/MSD) and the machine tool. If no setting values are specified by the machine manufacturer or the user, then they must be carefully determined and optimized by the start-up engineer.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) SIN 840C with 611D controller ... Current controller cycle MD 1000 Speed controller cycle MD 1001 Comments Single-axis performance 125 µs 125 µs Default value Single-axis performance 62.5 µs 62,5 µs Minimum Single-axis performance 125 µs 250 µs as from SW 6 Single-axis performance 125 µs 500 µs as from SW 6 2-axis performance 125 µs 125 µs Default value/minimum 2-axis performance 1 axis present 62.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1004 07.97 Active on Power On Configuration structure Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 7FFF Hex Input of the configuration for control structures, speed measuring systems and functionality referred to the SIMODRIVE System 611D.
08.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1008 Active at once Encoder phase error compensation Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 - 20.0 20.0 Degrees With this machine data, a phase error compensation is performed. On unconditioned signal encoders (e.g. ERN 1387), phase errors can occur between the A and B tracks. These can be noticed by a rougher speed actual value, i.e.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1012 07.97 Active at once Function switch Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Input of the configuration for switch-on functionality referred to the SIMODRIVE System 611D.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 07.97 Note regarding bit 9: Incorrect parameterization, e.g. not on EQN MD 1011 (configuration actual-value acquisition, indirect measuring system) or MD 1030 (configuration actual-value acquisition, direct measuring system) or obsolete hardware (not suitable for EQN) or no encoder connected or incorrect encoder cable (for ERN instead of for EQN).
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 04.96 Notes: • The pulse frequency can be specified only in the quantization given in the table above. Other frequency inputs are rounded up or down to the next closest table value, e.g. 3150 Hz to 3200 Hz. 1101 Active on Power On Calc.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1102 Active on Power On Motor code number Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 65 535 – Input of motor order number (machine-readable product designation for Siemens motors). This number is transferred to the drive in the form of a motor code number. The user does not need to input a value (see also MD 1106).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 08.96 Motor table: MSD motors Order no. Rated speed Motor code no. Order no. nrated in rev/min Rated speed Motor code no.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor table: MSD motors Order no. Rated speed nrated in rev/min Motor code no. Order no. Rated speed nrated in rev/min Motor code no.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 08.96 Motor table: FDD motors Order no. Rated speed Motor code no. Order no. nrated in rev/min Rated speed Motor code no.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1103 Motor rated current Active on Power On Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 500.0 A Input of rated current consumption (RMS value) in operation at rated torque and rated speed as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or by automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 07.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1108 Active on Power On Thermal limit current, power section Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200.0 1.0 500.0 A Input of maximum thermally permissible current of power section. The input is an RMS value. This machine data is automatically parameterized for Siemens power sections by the machine data "Power section code number" (MD 1106).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1112 07.97 Active on Power On Number of pole pairs motor Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 4 – Input of number of pole pairs of motor as specified on the motor data sheet (also non-Siemens motor) or through automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). The pole pair number 0 is entered when motor/power section combinations which have not been enabled are loaded.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1115 Armature resistance Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0.0 0.0 20.0 Active on Power On Units Input of ohmic resistance of the armature winding (phase value) as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). Note: This data is relevant only for FDD drives.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1119 09.95 Active on Power On Inductance of series reactor Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 65.0 mH A series reactor is usually required for stable operation of the current controller on high-speed special asynchronous motors or low-leakage asynchronous motors. In this way the inductance of the reactor is taken into account in the current model.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1129 Active on Power On cos power factor Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0.8 0.0 1.0 Units cos is required for the calculation of the equivalent circuit diagrams from the data on the rating plate. Note: This machine data only applies to main spindle drives. 1130 Motor rated power Active on Power On Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 1 500.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1135 07.97 Active at once* Motor no-load voltage Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 500.0 V Input of motor no-load voltage as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). Note: This data is relevant only for MSD drives.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1139 Stator leakage reactance Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0.0 0.0 100.0 Active at once* Units Input of stator leakage reactance as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). Note: This data is relevant only for MSD drives.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1143 08.96 Active on Power On Upper speed Lh characteristic motor 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 50 000.0 rev/min Input of upper speed limit for the Lh characteristic (magnetizing inductivity Lh) as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102).
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1145 Active at once Breakdown torque reduction factor Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100.0 5.0 1 000.0 % Input of breakdown torque reduction factor as specified on the motor data sheet. The point at which the breakdown torque limit is applied can be altered in this machine data.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1150 07.97 Active at once P gain flux controller Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 400.0 0.0 100 000.0 A/Vs Input of the proportional gain of the flux controller or automatic paramterization (initialization) through the operator action Calculate controller data. Note: This data is relevant only for MSD drives.
08.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1190 Active at once Evaluation torque limit value Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 10 000 Nm This drive machine data does not have any effects on hardware and software. 1191 Active at once Matching factor servo limiting torque Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1.0 0.0 100.0 – From drive software version 1.00 to 2.
-180 1 Log 7–100 10 180 Blocking frequency 10 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a a a a aa aa aa a a aa aa aa aa a a
-180 1 Log © Siemens AG SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 10 1992 All Rights Reserved 100 6FC5197- AA50 1k aaa a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa 1k aaa a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a a aaa aaa a a a a aa aa aa aa a aaa aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a a aaa aaa a a a a a aa a a a a aaaa aa a a aaa aaa a a a a a aa a a a a aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 09.95 aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaa Specified: Blocking frequency 1 kHz, 500 Hz bandwidth and 250 Hz bandwidth numerator (damping) aa aaaaaa a a a a a aaa aaaaaa a a a a a a a a a aaaaaa a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aaaaaaa 20.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 3rd filter 4th filter 0 Low-pass (see MD 1206/1207) 1 Band-stop (see MD 1216/1217/1218) 0 Low-pass (see MD 1208/1209) 1 Band-stop (see MD 1219/1220/1221) Bit 2 Bit 3 Note: Before the filter type is configured, the appropriate filter machine data must be input. 1202 Active at once Natural frequency current setpoint filter 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 000.0 0.0 8 000.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1205 09.95 Active at once Damping current setpoint filter 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1.0 0.05 5.0 – Input of damping for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2 low-pass). The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) and MD 1201 (Type current setpoint filter).
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1209 Active at once Damping current setpoint filter 4 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1.0 0.05 5.0 – Input of damping for current setpoint filter 4 (PT2 low-pass). The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) and MD 1201 (Type current setpoint filter).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1211 09.95 Active at once Bandwidth current setpoint filter 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 1 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) and MD 1201 (Type current setpoint filter).
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1214 Active at once Bandwidth current setpoint filter 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 2 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) and MD 1201 (Type current setpoint filter).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1217 09.95 Active at once Bandwidth current setpoint filter 3 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 3 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) and MD 1201 (Type current setpoint filter).
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1220 Active at once Bandwidth current setpoint filter 4 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 4 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) and MD 1201 (Type current setpoint filter).
7–110 Constant torque range 1231 1232 MD 1235 Additional limitation through MD 1237 in generator operation © Siemens AG a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa a Additional limitation through MD 1239 in set-up mode a aaaaa aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1233 Active at once Generative limitation Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100.0 5.0 100.0 % Input of torque limit for braking operation (generator-mode torque limit). This input value is referred to the maximum motor-mode torque. If the 2nd torque limit is active, then the reference value is derived from machine data MD 1230 and MD 1231.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1236 07.97 Active at once 2nd power limit value Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100.0 5.0 100.0 % The 2nd power limit value entered in MD 1236 acts as a reduction factor referred to the 1st power limit value (MD 1235).
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1245 Active at once Threshold speed-dependent torque setpoint smoothing Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0.0 0.0 50 000.0 rev/min Input of speed value above which the torque setpoint smoothing function selected in machine data "Type current setpoint filter" (MD 1201) with the 2nd filter (low-pass/band-stop) is activated.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1250 07.97 Active at once Corner freq. curr. act. val. smooth. Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 100.0 0.0 8 000.0 Hz Input of -3dB corner frequency fo of cross-current actual value smoothing function (PT1 lowpass) for display purposes. Time constant T1 of the PT1 filter is calculated from the formula T1 = 1/(2 fo).
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1400 Motor rated speed Default value Active on Power On Lower input value Upper input value Units 0.0 25 000.0 50 000.0 (as from SW 6) rev/min 1 450.0 Input of motor rated speed as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). 1401 Max.
09.95 aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1405 Active at once Monitoring speed motor Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 110.0/100.0 100.0 110.0 % Input as percentage of maximum permissible speed setpoint as limit value for speed setpoint monitoring. Machine data "Speed for max. motor operational speed" (MD 1401) acts as the reference value. A message is output when the monitoring speed is exceeded.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1408 07.97 Active at once P-gain upper adaptation speed Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0.3 0.0 100 000.0 Nm/s-1 Input of P-gain of the speed control loop in the upper speed range (n > upper speed threshold in MD 1412) or automatic parameterization (initialization) via operation ”Calculate controller data” for MSD.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Notes: • Setting the reset time to zero deactivates the I-action component for the range which is greater than the machine data "Adaptation upper speed threshold (MD 1412) (see also Note in MD 1409). • MD 1410 is not active when the "Speed controller adaptation" is deactivated (MD 1413 = 0).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1413 09.95 Active at once Selection adaptation speed controller Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0 0 1 – This machine data allows adaptation of the speed controller machine data to be controlled as a function of speed. Input 0: The adaptation function is not active. The settings in control machine data MD 1407 and MD 1409 are applicable over the entire speed range.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1415 Active at once Damping reference model speed control loop Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 1.0 0.5 5.0 – Input of damping for the "Speed control loop" reference model. This is a reference model (PT2) for the speed control loop with a controller of the PIR type. The higher the input value, the stronger the damping effect.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1420 04.96 Active at once Maximum motor speed set-up mode Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 30.0 0.0 50 000.0 rev/min Input of maximum motor speed for set-up mode. During set-up, the absolute speed setpoint value is limited to the value specified above. If the speed setpoint is limited to the value set in MD 1420, a message is also output.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1425 Active at once Symmetr.calc.deadtime I-controller Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 1.0 – Selection of a filter in the speed feedforward control channel to simulate the calculation dead time of the current control loop. Effective only when the speed/torque feedforward control function is active. MD 1004, bit 0.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 08.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Relation between control word (MD 11004) and control word (MD 11002). MD 1500 Status MD 1500 > 0 MD 1500 > 0 MD 1500=0 Type of 1st filter - Low-pass (MD 1501.0 = 0) Band-stop (MD 1501.0 = 1) Inactive (MD 1501.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 09.95 Note: Before the filter type is configured, the appropriate filter machine data must be input. 1502 Active at once Time constant speed setpoint filter 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 500.0 ms Input of time constant for speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1 low-pass). The filter is deactivated when the data is set to zero.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1507 Active at once Damping speed setpoint filter 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.7 0.2 5.0 – Input of damping for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2 low-pass). The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) and MD 1201 (Type current setpoint filter). Note: • With interpolating axes, the speed setpoint filter must always be parameterized immediately.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1514 04.96 Active at once Block frequency speed setpoint filter 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 500.0 1.0 7 999.0 Hz Input of block frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 and parameterization as simple band-stop filter. The filter is activated via machine data MD 1500 (number of setpoint filters) and MD 1501 (type speed setpoint filter).
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Note: aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa a a a a aa aaaaaaaaaa a a a a aaaa a a a a aaaa a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a aaaa a a a a aaaa a a a a aaaa a a a aa aaaaaaa a a a a aaaa a a a a aaaa a a a a aaaa a a a a aaaa a a a aa aaaaa The maximum block frequency input value is limited by the sampling frequency of the servo control (MD 1001) (parameterization error).
180 Phase Deg -180 5 7–130 Log Hz a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a a a a a aaa a a a a a a aaaaa -60.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa 09.95 aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa 20.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 09.95 Note: When 0 is entered for the bandwidth, the filter is parameterized as a proportional element with a gain of 1. 1519 Active at once Numerator bandwidth speed setpoint f. 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 7 999.0 Hz The description of this machine data is the same as that for machine data MD 1516! 1520 Active at once Band-stop filter natural frequency speed setpoint f.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa 180 Phase Deg -180 500 m © Siemens AG Log Hz SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Log Hz a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a -30.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1521 08.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Note: Reset 611D alarms can be acknowledged via a software reset. Caution: Concealing the reset alarms may result in irreparable damage to the power section. 1601 Active at once Concealable alarms (Reset) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex This machine data allows reset 611D alarms to be concealed or disabled. The alarm is active if the appropriate bit = 0.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1603 07.97 Active at once Timer motor temperature alarm Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 240 0 600 s Input of timer for the motor temperature alarm. When the value set in "Motor temperature warning" (MD 1602) is exceeded, a message is transferred to the SERVO and a time monitor activated.
08.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1607 Active at once Switchoff limit motor temperature Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 155 0 200 °C Input of motor temperature at which motor must be switched off. The motor temperature is detected via temperature sensors and evaluated in the drive. The motor is braked in generator mode when the shutdown limit is reached.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1611 07.97 Active at once Response threshold dn/dt Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 800 0 1 600 % Input of response threshold for dn/dt monitoring function. Caution: This machine data is required for the load test. It is relevant only for internal Siemens processes and must not be altered. 1612 Active at once Config. shutdown react.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1613 Config. shutdown react. RESET alarms Active at once Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0100/FFFF 0000 FFFF Hex Input bit field for switching over the appropriate 611D reset alarm. It is possible to select one of two shutdown reactions, i.e. pulse disable (bit = 1) or controller disable (bit = 0 =ˆ nset = 0 =ˆ generator-mode braking), i.e.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 09.95 Value table: Bit 0 Variable message function 0 = not active 1 = active Bit 1 Segment variable message function 0 = address space X 1 = address space Y Bit 2 Comparison variable message function 0 = comparison without sign 1 = comparison with sign Note: Bit 1 is effective only if signal number 0 is selected in MD 1621 (signal number variable message function).
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 09.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1622 Active at once Address variable message function Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Input of address of memory location to be monitored via the variable message function. Note: This machine data is operative only if the signal number is set to 0 (see MD 1621).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1625 07.97 Active at once Pickup delay variable message function Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10 000 ms Input of ON (pickup) delay time for setting of the message if the threshold (with hysteresis) is exceeded (see diagram under MD 1620).
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1632 Active at once Voltage step for generator control Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 30 0 300 V Input of response threshold of DC link voltage. In conjunction with machine data "Response voltage generator axis" (MD 1631), this data defines the voltage range for the upper threshold of the two-step controller for generator operation.
a a a aa a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
aaaaaaaaa aaa aaa a a aaa aaaaa aaa aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1650 04.96 Active at once Diagnosis control Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Input to select a variety of diagnostic functions in the diagnostic control word. Caution: This machine data is relevant only for Siemens-internal purposes and must not be altered.
04.96 • 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Diagnostic function "Voltage-controlled Vq operation" (up to SW 4) A voltage-controlled operating mode (V/F mode) is applied in order to diagnose speed or current sensor faults. In this operating mode, voltages Vq and Vd = 0 as well as a frequency are input as controlled quantities.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 04.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1652 Active at once Memory location min/max memory Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Input of address of memory location to be monitored via the min/max memory function. Note: This machine data is operative only if the signal number is set to 0 (see MD 1651). Caution: This machine data is relevant only for Siemens-internal purposes and must not be altered.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1655 04.96 Active at once Segment memory location monitor Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 – This machine data addresses the memory location segment for the monitoring function. Value table: 0 DSP address space X 1 DSP address space Y MD 1655 defines the DSP address in conjunction with MD 1656 (offset address).
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1657 Active at once Value display monitor Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF Hex Output of monitoring function display value. This machine data displays the content of the address resulting from the segment (MD 1655) and the offset (MD 1656).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1661 04.96 Active at once Ratio V/f during V/f mode (SW 4.4 only) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2.4 0.0 100.0 V/Hz Input of a voltage/frequency ratio value for the drive in voltage-controlled V/F operation.
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa aaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaa 1. ( 2.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 07.97 When DELTA is calculated, it must be taken into account that the torque setpoint limitation mset,limit may change in cyclic operation. This limitation acts on the maximum speed difference nmax.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1702 Active at once Motor temperature Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32 767 °C This machine data is used to display the motor temperature. The motor temperature is measured by appropriate sensors and evaluated in the drive. 1703 Active at once Lead time conver. motor meas. syst.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1707 07.97 Active at once Speed actual value Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0.0 -100000.0 100000.0 rev/min This machine data is used to display the actual speed value and represents the unfiltered actual speed value. Time-synchronous unlatching (scanning) of machine data MD 1706, MD 1707 and MD 1708 is not provided.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1711 Active at once Significance speed representation Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0.0 -100000.0 100000.0 rev/min This machine data is used to display the significance of the speed representation. The user is informed of the significance of bit 0 (internal speed actual value representation) so that he can assign the internal speed status representation to the physical rotation values.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1719 07.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1723 Active at once Ramp-up time Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32767 ms Load test: The ramp-up time of the drive is indicated in this machine data. The ramp-up time is the time between one 0-1 edge of the control word signal "Ramp-function generator active" and the moment the actual speed enters the tolerance range around the setpoint speed defined by MD 1426.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1730 07.97 Active at once Operating mode (display) Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 FFF Hex This data indicates the current operating mode.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 1735 Active at once CPU load (as from SW 6) Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 100 % The processor capacity displays the remaining available CPU time online.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 04.96 1798 Active at once Firmware date Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32 767 – Output of coded software version in decimal notation. The software version is output in the following form: DDMMY, where DD = day, MM = month and Y = last digit of the year. Example: 01.06.
04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) MD No. Motor 2 Title MD No.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 04.96 MD No. Motor 2 Title MD No. Motor 1 2410 Integral-action time upper adaptation speed 1410 2411 Lower adaptation speed 1411 2412 Upper adaptation speed 1412 2413 Selection adaptation speed controller 1413 2414 Natural frequency ref.
07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4 FDD/MSD-specific diagnosis/service machine data (as from SW 3) 7.4 FDD/MSD-specific diagnosis/service machine data (as from SW 3) 7.4.1 Output of diagnosis/service machine data (as from SW 3) The diagnosis/service machine data provide an overview and evaluation of signals and states of the FDD/MSD drives. 7.4.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.2 Servo service data (SSD) 3002 07.97 Active at once Quadrant error (QEC – as from SW 4) Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – -99999.999 99999.999 mm/ms This machine data displays the quadrant error plane at the instant at which the appropriate axis executed the last speed zero crossing when quadrant error compensation (QEC) is active. The display is called by means of softkey Service QEC in the "Circularity test" menu.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis/service MD (data description - as from SW 3) 1010010114 10119 1) Active on Power on Module order code (as from SW 4) Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 65535 - The "Module order code" machine data contains the selected module in the form of a decimal code number. In the case of two-axis modules, the data contains two sets of information.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis/service MD (data description - as from SW 3) 11000 10.94 Active at once Ramp-up phase Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 0505 – The "Ramp-up phase" machine data contains the control word for the ramp-up control of the 611D components. This machine data is provided for every logical, digital drive number.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis/service MD (data description - as from SW 3) 11002 Active after ramp-up of 611D link Status word 1 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 FFFF Hex This machine data contains the low-order status bits (bits 0 - 15) of the cyclical status word at the interface between SERVO and 611D.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis/service MD (data description - as from SW 3) 11004 09.95 Active after ramp-up of 611D link Status word 1 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 FFFF Hex This machine data contains the low-order status bits (bits 0-15) of the cyclical status word at the interface between SERVO and 611D.
09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis/service MD (data description - as from SW 3) 10.
10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis/service MD (data description - as from SW 3) 11009 Active at once Capacity utilization (as from SW 4) Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 7FFF Hex This machine data specifies the capacity utilization of the digital drive as a percentage (0 ... 7FFF H =ˆ 0 ... 100%).
7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis/service MD (data description - as from SW 3) 12000 04.96 Active at once Position actual value Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – -99999999 99999999 – Output of currently valid position actual value which is dependent on the position control for rotary axes (NC-MD 5640.5) and position control resolution (NC-MD 18000.0-3). The information is output in the drive service displays.
a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaa
a a a aa a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.1.2 Breakdown of the PLC MD 8.1.2 08.96 Breakdown of the PLC MD PLC MD 0 to 839 2000 to 2849 4000 to 4049 6000 to 6599 7000 to 7799 8000 to 8199 DB Description Softkey Section DB60 MD for operating system System data 8.2 DB61 MD for function blocks FB data 8.3 DB62 MD for user User data 8.4 DB63 MD bits for operating system System bits 8.5 DB64 MD bits for function blocks FB bits 8.6 DB65 MD bits for user User bits 8.7 Example: PLC MD No.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 2 DB 60 DW 2 Time base for calling OB 5 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 +1 3 2.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 8 1) 09.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) Example: Value in PLC MD 11 = 71 when 1st machine control panel in PLC MD 128 is set to start address 64. I byte 0 : : : I byte 71 I byte 72 : : I byte 127 Signals from the machine Can be used as additional flag area Max. 128 bytes on 135 WB 13 Reserved 14 Reserved DB 60 DW 13 DB 60 DW 14 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 – – – 17 DB 60 DW 17 No.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 19 09.95 DB 60 DW 19 No. of function numbers Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 0 10 – Number of function numbers for a UI kernel sequence initiation. Input values: 0 = UI kernel sequence initiation not allowed in this PLC 1...10 (max.) = UI kernel sequence initiation allowed.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) You can enable the individual bits in PLC MD 6052, and set the positive or negative edge to be evaluated in PLC MD 6055. A rapid input is possible only when bit 0 of PLC MD 6051 is set to "0". OB2 is invoked when bit 2 of PLC MD 6050 is "0". 33 DB 60 DW 33 No.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 06.93 Table for MD 34 to 123 PLC MD, Interface DB60 DW 8–8 Terminal PLC MD MPC line block No. standard No.
06.93 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) PLC MD, Interface DB60 DW Terminal MPC line block No. No.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 09.95 124 Byte no. of 1st alarm byte 125 Byte no. of 2nd alarm byte 126 Byte no. of 3rd alarm byte 127 Byte no. of 4th alarm byte DB 60 DW 124 DB 60 DW 125 DB 60 DW 126 DB 60 DW 127 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units -1 -1 127 (SW 4 and higher) – This PLC MD can be used to define as many as 4 input bytes as alarm bytes. The PLC software scans these bytes for changes every 10 ms.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.3 PLC MD for function blocks (FB data) 8.3 09.01 PLC MD for function blocks (FB data) 2000 to 2077 Default value DB 61 DW 0 - 77 PLC MD values for tool management package Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 – For values and their meanings, refer to the Tool Management description.
09.95 8.5 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 7 6 6000 1) DL 0 5 4 3 6 2) 5 2) 4 2 1 0 Signals from/to NC channel Default value: 3 2 1 0000 1111 This MD is used to enable the interchange of channel signals between NC and PLC. Because the 840 system has a one-channel basic configuration, bit 0 must be "1".
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. 09.95 Bit No. 7 6 6012 1) DL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 1 Signals from/to spindle 6 Default value: 5 4 3 0000 0001 This MD enables the interchange of spindle signals between NC and PLC. As the basic configuration of the 840T includes only one spindle, bit 0 must be "1". If more than one spindle is available, you must set the bits corresponding to the channels in this MD.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 7 Enable serial interface DB37 6026 DL 13 6 5 Enable init in same channel Deselect autom. NC START INHIBIT with MDA 4 3 2 1 Save flag area Access to PLC data inhibited with @ Command channel enabled 0 Default value: 1000 000 Bit 7 When bit 7 is set, data can be read in and out via the computer link interface with DB 37.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. 09.95 Bit No. 7 6 5 4 6030 DL 15 3 4 Default value: 2 1 Error/operational messages on inactive channels 1) 3 2 0 1 All bits default to 0 0 signal: Corresponding inactive channel DB is not used to activate error/operational messages. 1 signal: The inactive channel DB is used to activate error/operational messages.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 7 6032 DL 16 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DL 7 DR 6 DL 6 DL 11 DR 10 DL 10 Alarm channel DB DR 9 DL 9 DR 8 6033 DR 16 DL 8 DR 7 Alarm channel DB DR 11 Default value: All bits default to 0 Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for error messages.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. 09.95 Bit No. 7 6 5 6035 DR 17 4 3 2 1 0 Alarm DB 32 DR k+3 Default value: DL k+3 All bits default to 0 K = 0, 4, 8, 12, ... 116 (1st to 30th axis) Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for error messages. Bit = 1 The system software evaluates the bits in the corresponding interface byte for error messages.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 7 6040 DL 20 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DL 7 DR 6 DL 6 DL 11 DR 10 DL 10 Signal channel DB DR 9 DL 9 6041 DR 20 DR 8 DL 8 DR7 Signal channel DB DR 11 Default value: All bits default to 0 Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. 09.95 Bit No. 7 6 5 6042 DL 21 4 3 2 1 0 Signal DB 31 DR k+3 DL k+3 Default value: All bits default to 0 K = 0, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 (1st to 6th spindle) Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages. Bit = 1 The system software evaluates the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. 7 6 5 4 6044 DL 22 DR 4 DL 4 DR 3 DL 3 6045 DR 22 DR 8 DL 8 DR 7 DL 7 6046 DL 23 Bit No.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. 7 6 5 6048 DL 24 OB 7 OB 6 OB 5 09.95 Bit No. 4 3 2 1 0 Stop during processing delay by Default value: OB 4 OB 3 OB 2 1111 1100 Bit = 0 A delay in the relevant OB does not force the programmable controller to STOP. Bit = 1 A delay in the relevant OB forces the programmable controller to STOP.
a aaaaaa aaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a aaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a aaa a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 09.95 PLC MD DB63 DW No. 7 6 6052 DL 26 7 6 5 4 6053 DR 26 7 6 5 4 Bit No. 5 4 3 2 1 0 Enable central interrupt byte IF PLC/PLC 135 WD 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 1 0 Reserved Default value: 0 An EU interface module's eight interrupt inputs can be enabled separately. Bit = 0 Input is disabled Bit = 1 Input is enabled for OB 2 call Also see PLC MD 30. PLC MD DB63 DW No. 7 6 6055 DR 27 7 6 Bit No.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6064 DL 32 Default value: Bit 0 All bits default to 0 Bit = 0 PL/M programming not possible Bit = 1 PL/M programming Permits function blocks written in the higher-level programming language PL/M to be processed in the 135 WB. PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Default value: PLC MD DB63 DW No.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 09.95 PLC MD Default values 6400 - 6431 0000 0001 6480 - 6511 0000 0001 6560 - 6563 1111 1111 6572 - 6575 1111 1111 These PLC MDs are internal system bits. The default values must not be changed. Byte No. DB63 PLC MD 15 14 7 6 10 9 8 2 1 0 6068 DL 34 Edge for interrupt byte 1st DMP interface module 1st line, 6069 DR 34 Edge for interrupt byte 1st DMP interface module 2nd line, bits 0...
09.95 Byte No. 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 15 Processing of operational messages (IA) 14 13 12 11 10 Bit No.
8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD No. DW No. 15 14 7 6 11.92 PLC performance (IA) 13 12 11 Bit No. 5 4 3 6096 DL 48 Reserved 6097 DR 48 Reserved 6098 DL 49 Reserved 6099 DR 49 Reserved 10 9 8 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 Bit No. 7 MD No. 6 5 4 3 6400 .. 6419 Internal system bits Bit 0 must be set to 1 6480 .. 6499 Internal system bits Bit 0 must be set to 1 MD 6400 to 6574 without DB. 8.
09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.7 PLC MD bits for the user (user bits) 8.7 PLC MD bits for the user (user bits) PLC MD DB65 DW No. Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8000 to 8049 DW 0 DW 24 Default value: 0 In addition to PLC MD words, PLC MD bits are also available to the user to do with as he sees fit. The available bit area comprises 25 words (400 bits).
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1 General Comments 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) Introduction SW 3 / SW 4 provides support for drive start-up and diagnostics by means of the following functions: Description in section 9.1 Measurement of drive control loops (current, speed, position) 9.2 Function generator 9.3 DAC output Mixed I/O output 9.
09.95 10.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) The following start conditions must be fulfilled when the measuring functions are started. S NC operating mode “JOG” selected. S No traversing command for the axis/spindle (NCK or command channel). The “Overstore” function is disabled while the measurement is in progress. The axis or spindle interface is operated depending on which interface (spindle or (C) axis) is active when test mode is selected.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1.1 Selection of/menu trees drive servo start-up application 9.1.1 Selection of/menu trees of drive servo start-up application Diagnosis Start-up Drive servo startup Explanation The drive servo start-up display (identical to the machine configuration display MDD) is called by means of the “Diagnosis”, “Start-up” and “Drive servo startup” softkeys.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1.1 Selection of/menu trees drive servo start-up application D Menu tree: Axis start-up function Start-up fct. axis Current Speed Position Function contr. loop contr. loop contr. loop generator 1) Measurement Meas. paras. Contr. para drive Display File functions Measurement Meas.paras. Contr.para drive Display File functions Measurement Meas.paras. Contr.para Contr.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1.1 Selection of/menu trees drive servo start-up application D Menu tree: Spindle start-up function Start-up fct. spindle Current 1) Speed Position Function contr. loop contr. loop contr. loop generator 1) Measurement Meas. paras. Contr.para drive Display File functions Measurement Meas. paras. Contr.para drive Display File functions Measurement Meas. paras. Contr.para Contr.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1.2 Softkeys D Copying / pasting measuring parameter files into / from the clipboard Copy to clipboard Paste from clipboard With these softkeys you can re-use measuring parameter files that have been stored for the axis X, for example, for other axes as well (e.g. for axis Y). The same function can also be used for spindles. Note: S It is not possible to copy measuring parameter files from axes to spindles and vice versa.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1.2 Softkeys X marker Y marker Expand Picture 1 This softkey activates or deactivates the marker with the horizontal direction of movement. This marker is displayed as a vertical line which can be moved along the displayed curve by the cursor control keys on the operator panel (shift + cursor= fast movement). The X and Y coordinates corresponding to the present position of the marker are displayed.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1.2 Softkeys Note Display With SW 4 and higher, the Contr.para FDD and Contr.para MSD softkeys have been combined under the Contr.para drive softkey with one exception: Under the circularity test function, the softkeys have remained as they were in SW 3. You can call up the graphic display of measurement results with this softkey. Fig. 9.3 File functions You can enter the file function area by selecting this softkey.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.1.2 Softkeys Explanation This softkey gives you access to the control functions Load, Save and Delete with which you can load, save or delete a special measurement setting (configuration). Displays/measurement results can likewise be loaded, saved or deleted.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2 Measuring the drive servo loops (current, speed, position) 9.2 Measuring the drive servo loops (current, speed, position) Note When measuring the spindle it is important not to enter the weak field range as this produces an incorrect display.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2 Measuring the drive servo loops (current, speed, position) e.g. for 125 ms sampling time (cycle) Owing to the short measuring times, traversing paths of a few revolutions are sufficient for the frequency response measurement. The measurement time is calculated as follows: 512 x No. of averaging ops Meas.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.1 Current control loop (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) You can set the filters or controller parameters as required by means of “Contr.para FDD” or “Contr.para MSD”. You should check their effect immediately after a further measurement. You can also determine from the Bode diagram whether the available high dynamic response of the SIMODRIVE drives is being fully utilized.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.2 Current control loop – measurement parameters (as from SW 3) 9.2.2 Current control loop – measurement parameters (as from SW 3) Default settings Meas. parameter Measurement = frequency response and measured quantity = current actual value. You can select the menu with the measurement parameters for the current control loop with this softkey. Note You enter the measurement parameters in the selected display.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.3 Speed control loop (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) 9.2.3 Speed control loop (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) Speed control loop Notes You can select the measuring function for the speed control loop with this softkey. Test measurements on the speed control loop (axis and spindle) can be performed on both analog and digital drives. Applic.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.4 Speed control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (4 basic settings – as from SW 3) 9.2.4 Speed control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (4 basic settings – as from SW 3) Overview of measurement types The types of measurement available depend on the type of drive used. Various variables can be measured depending on the type of measurement selected.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.4 Speed control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (4 basic settings – as from SW 3) As from SW 6: S The offset is reached along an acceleration ramp.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.4 Speed control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (4 basic settings – as from SW 3) D 3rd measurement type: Setpoint step change The transient response of the speed control in the time range can be assessed with the step stimulation function for setpoint or disturbance variables. If an offset value other than zero is input, the step change is stimulated during transition. Meas.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.4 Speed control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (4 basic settings – as from SW 3) D 4th Measurement type: Disturbance step change The transient response of the speed control in the time range can be assessed with the step stimulation function for setpoint or disturbance variables. If an offset value other than zero is input, the step change is stimulated during transition. Meas.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.6 Position control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (9 basic settings – as from SW 3) 9.2.6 Position control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (9 basic settings – as from SW 3) Overview of types of measurement The types of measurement listed below are not dependent on the drive used. Various variables can be measured depending on the measurement type selected.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.6 Position control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (9 basic settings – as from SW 3) S Averaging operations The higher this value is set, the more accurate the measurement and the longer the measurement time. You should normally enter a value of 20. S Settling time Notes This value represents the delay between the start of measured data recording and injection of the test signal and offset. Set the value to between 0.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.2.6 Position control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (9 basic settings – as from SW 3) Notes In order to ensure a more gentle machine setting, the lowest possible values should be set for amplitude and offset. Excessively high input values result in the output of alarm messages such as “1560 Speed setpoint alarm limit violated”.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3 Function generator (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) 9.3 Function generator (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) Function generator You can select the function generator with this softkey. Note Axes and spindles can be traversed with the function generator in both analog and digital drives.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3 Function generator (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) D Selection of function generator parameterization “Signal types with operating modes” Signal parameters Note You can select the menu with the signal parameters for the function generator in the five operating modes with this softkey. You enter the signal parameters in the selected displays. These parameters are managed internally as configuration data rather than machine data, i.e.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.2 Additional information (notes) on measurement and signal parameters (as from SW 3) 9.3.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) D Square-wave (speed setpoint) Speed setpoint +A O t –A E1 T2 T1 E2 Fig. 9.6 Conditions Operating mode Signal type E1 E2 T1 T2 A O Explanation : Speed setpoint (position controller cycle) : Square-wave : Switch-on instant (NC Start hardkey) : Switch-off instant (e.g.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) Conditions Operating mode : Speed setpoint (position controller cycle) : Sawtooth : Switch-on instant (NC Start hardkey) : Switch-off instant (e.g. NC Reset) : Period : Amplitude (+/–) : Speed offset Signal type E1 E2 T1 A O Explanation The speed setpoint is output with a delay via a filter during braking. The speed setpoint amplitude acts in relation to the speed offset.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) D Ramp 1 (position setpoint) Position A s RD ESD t MD Speed characteristic v O t Fig. 9.9 Conditions Operating mode Signal type ESD RD MD A O : : : : : : : Position setpoint Ramp Settling time Ramp time Measuring time Amplitude Speed offset Note Set acceleration is very high (speed characteristic).
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) D Ramp 2 (position setpoint with reduced acceleration value) Position A s RD ESD t MD Speed characteristic v O t Fig. 9.10 Conditions Operating mode Signal type ESD RD MD A O Note Set acceleration is lower (speed characteristic). Explanation The setpoint characteristic is the same as that in the ramp 1 diagram except that the drive acceleration has been reduced.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) D Step change (speed setpoint) Speed setpoint v A O ESD MD t Position characteristic s t Fig. 9.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) D Step change (position setpoint) Position setpoint s A ESD MD t Speed characteristic v O t Fig. 9.12 Conditions Operating mode Signal type ESD MD A O Explanation During the settling period and on completion of the position step change, the drive is operated with the specified speed offset.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) D Effect of scaling on the signal waveform +A nset 0.65 A t E3 –A Fig. 9.13 Conditions Operating mode Signal type E3 A Explanation 9–32 : Speed setpoint (position controller cycle) : Sawtooth : Change in scaling value by user (e.g. from 65% to 100%) : Amplitude (+/–) A new scaling value is input via the Start softkey at instant in time E3.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.4 Mixed I/O configuration and digital-analog converter, DAC (as from SW 3) 9.4 Mixed I/O configuration and digital-analog converter, DAC (as from SW 3) General notes on mixed I/O The possible applications for digital-analog converters described in this Section are used to conduct test measurements on digital signals from the drive or position control.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.4 Mixed I/O configuration and digital-analog converter, DAC (as from SW 3) Note The test sockets on 611D modules have an output voltage of between 0 and 5 V; 611A modules have a +/–10 V output. The test sockets can be evaluated in the usual way. These sockets are not intended for use in normal operation. Anwahl Diagnosis Start-up Drive servo startup Configur. DAC Configur. mixed I/O Configur. DAC Fig. 9.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.4 Mixed I/O configuration and digital-analog converter, DAC (as from SW 3) Notes Lower input limit Upper input limit SERVO (SW 3 SW 4) –7 31 FDD (SW 3/SW 4) –7 23 MSD (SW 3) 0 15 MSD (SW 4) –7 23 Make sure that the selected drive (display) corresponds to the connected test sockets (DACs) of the appropriate drive (module) in the case of 611D signals. Servo signals (max.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.4 Mixed I/O configuration and digital-analog converter, DAC (as from SW 3) Explanation In this display, the output DACs are assigned via drive selection (+/–) and specification of the axis/spindle name. The offset input values must make allowance for the output range of the analog voltage signal. The 611D drive module DACs have an output range of –2.5 V to 2.5 V.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.4 Mixed I/O configuration and digital-analog converter, DAC (as from SW 3) Selection list for 611D MSD (spindle) only Selection meas.
09.95 07.97 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5 Quadrant error compensation 9.5 Quadrant error compensation 9.5.1 General comments Technical reasons why If an axis is accelerated from a negative to a positive velocity (or vice versa), it quadrant error compen- sticks when passing through zero speed because of the changing friction sation is necessary conditions. this action causes contour errors with interpolating axes.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.2 Circularity test (option – SW 4) Fig. 9.16 Explanation Measurement The axis names with which the circle is to be traversed are selected in this display. No check is made to ascertain whether the selected axes correspond to those programmed in the part program.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.2 Circularity test (option – SW 4) Display Any measurements which may not be complete at the point of interruption are displayed as well as possible under the Display softkey. No monitoring functions are activated in this case. The part program (for circle traversal) and the measurement function are not synchronized.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.2 Circularity test (option – SW 4) Note The displayed measurement results can be stored as a file on the MMC by selecting softkey File functions. Data output of circularity test measurement results Data can be output on an external PC via the V24 interface and by means of commands in the “Services” menu. The extensions for “Services” required for this purpose are listed in the requirements to other areas.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) Corresponding data S MD 1332* 1236* 1240* 1244* 1248* 1252* 1256* S MD 1804*, bit 6 1804*, bit 7 1824*, bit 0 Parameterization The friction feedforward control is activated axis-specifically via MD 1804*, bit 6. If MD 1804*, bit 7 is set, the adaptation characteristic also becomes active.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) Counter 2 II I Counter 1 Quadrant transition point III Fig. 9.20 Setting the compensating amplitude IV Radius deviations at the quadrant transition points without compensation If the compensating amplitude is too small, the circularity test shows that the radius deviations from the programmed radius at the quadrant crossover points have insufficient compensation (see Fig. 9.21).
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) Counter 2 II I Counter 1 III Fig. 9.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) Counter 2 II I Counter 1 III Fig. 9.24 IV Compensation time constant too large If it is not possible to find a uniform compensation time constant for the various radii and velocities, the average value of the derived time constants is used.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) 9.5.3.2 Installation with adaptation characteristic If the compensation is acceleration dependant, a characteristic must be determined in a second stage. The required compensation amplitudes for different radii and velocities are determined, the effect of the compensating amplitudes checked in a circularity test and the optimum compensation amplitudes logged.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) curve have been correctly calculated and/or have been entered in the correct input format (caution: MD 1252* uses a format factor 100 larger than MDs 1244* and 1248*!) Example for setting the characteristic a.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) Explanation/basic principles The quadrant error compensation function reduces the contour errors resulting from friction, backlash or torsional stresses during reversal. Errors are compensated through the injection of an additional speed setpoint pulse at the instant of zero crossing of the speed setpoint (see diagram below on left).
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) The operating procedure from SW 3 can still be used if, for example, the conditions listed under facilitation of start-up cannot be met or if there is insufficient computing time available for the neuronal network. Quantization of tof operating range The input quantity (setpoint acceleration) is quantized before it is processed by the CMAC network.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) Interval width 1 2 a1 a2 3 a3 Acceleration Fig. 9.28 Values a1 (lower range limit) and a2 (medium range limit) can be parameterized (see Function parameters softkey), a3 (max. acceleration) is the upper limit of the parameterized operating range.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) D Standard start-up QEC Explanation The start-up process is semi-automatic and does not involve any external equipment. The contour accuracy achieved can be checked by means of the circularity test implemented internally in the control or with the aid of external measuring equipment. The standard start-up procedure is described and explained below.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) Acceleration +a1 +a2 +a1 +a2 t –a1 –a2 TPer TPer TPer Velocity t Path t Fig. 9.29 The test signal generates successive reversing processes which are executed at an acceleration rate which slowly decreases over the three sections of the operating range.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) 9.5.4.1 Start-up of neural QEC Neural QEC You can select the “Neural quadrant error compensation” function for axes with this softkey. Fig. 9.30 Explanation/Notes The input/information output display Learn has the same structure as the Measurement displays in the other axial start-up functions.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) D Neural QEC parameterization Function parameters You can select the menu with the function parameters for the neural QEC function with this softkey. Fig. 9.31 Notes You enter the function parameters in this display. If the neural QEC has not yet been started up for this axis, all parameters are set to 0.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) between 4 and 32 may be entered. The default setting after “Load default” is 8. S Coarse quantization This parameter defines the coarse quantization of the input quantity. Values of >1 and <250 may be entered. The default setting after “Load default” is 49. S Initialization value This parameter determines the initialization value of the compensation amplitude.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) 9.5.4.2 Further optimization and intervention options Checking methods 1st method: Circularity test 2nd method: Display of characteristic – in this display, the compensation amplitude is output as a % of the maximum speed as a function of the set memory partitioning.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) Direction-specific compensation Direction-specific injection can be selected via a function parameter under the Function parameters softkey. This is necessary in cases where the compensation is not equally effective in opposing quadrants when the injection is not direction-specific (see diagram below).
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) The number of learning process runs can be reduced particularly in cases where data blocks are already available for the machine type in question so that only minor optimization measures are required.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) The decay time is not adapted when a value of 0 or of less than or equal to the value in NC-MD 12360 is entered in NC-MD 13640. Monitoring of the decay time continues to ensure that it cannot become a negative value at maximum acceleration (100 % of acceleration in diagram below).
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) In special cases, however, it may still be necessary to re-parameterize the error measuring times: S Setting of very extreme values for the compensation time constant (NC-MD 12360). Experience shows that error measuring times of <10 ms and >200 ms are not effective.
09.95 10.94 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) 9.5.4.3 Power ON/OFF – monitoring functions – special functions (SW 4) Power ON procedure After power ON, the boot file stored for the neuronal QEC must be transferred from the MMC to the SERVO. These data are transferred in the same way as 611D drive machine data are booted.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.6 SERVO trace (SW 4) 9.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.6 SERVO trace (SW 4) Trigger conditions for starting the recording can be set in the field marked “Trigger”.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.6.1 Selection of measured signal 9.6.1 Selection of measured signal Selection meas. signal You can select lists containing a selection of signals with this vertical softkey (see Fig. 9.35). Explanation Signals are selected or deselected with the cursor hardkeys and softkeys ok and Abort. The page-up and page-down hardkeys can be used to scroll in this list.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.6.1 Selection of measured signal SIEMENS Service 3 You can select the SIEMENS Service 3 function with this vertical softkey. The displayed signals are not explained here. The SIEMENS Service 3 softkey function is relevant only for SIEMENS servicing procedures and should be used only after consultation via the hotline. Fig. 9.36 Physical addresses can be defined in this display.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.6.2 SERVO trace display 9.6.2 Display SERVO trace display You can call the graphic representation of the SERVO trace function by selecting this softkey. Follow.g error Part. setpt Fig. 9.37 Explanation Two SERVO trace signals are output in this display. The trigger is shown as a vertical, broken line. Note The displayed measurement results can be transferred to the MMC for storage as a file by means of softkey File functions.
09.95 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9.6.2 SERVO trace display Configure display The two displays (Picture 1/Picture 2) can be set by means of this softkey. Fig. 9.38 Explanation The displays called by means of softkey Display (Picture 1/Picture 2) can be set in the above display. The displays can be allocated to trace buffers 1 to 4 in the input fields marked “Picture 1” and “Picture 2”.
a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.1 Determining sampling interval and interpolation time 09.95 Setting • • • • • Enter drive basic cycle time in MD 168 (in 62.5 µs). Enter position control basic clock frequency in MD 155 (multiplier MD 168). Enter ratio to interpolation time in MD 160. If MD is incorrect, alarm 1012* ”Parameterization error” drive MD is output.
a a aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaa aaa aaa a aaaaa aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaa aaa aaaa aaa a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2 Axis-specific resolutions 10.2 06.93 Axis-specific resolutions Corresponding data MD 5002 MD 564* MD 1800* MD 1800* bit 4-7 bit 5 bit 0-3 bit 4-7 Input resolution Rotary axis Position control resolution Display resolution Indirectly related: MD 155 MD 160 MD 168 Position controller's sampling interval Ratio of interpolation to position control Basic cycle time of drive 10.2.
a a a a a a a aaaaaa aaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaa a a a aaa a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.3 Resolution block diagram 12.93 10.2.3 Resolution block diagram Input Display Input resolution MD 5002 bits 4-7 G70/G71 Display resolution MD 1800* bits 4-7 X 0.5 Geometry resolution Unit system MD 5002 bits 4-7 Service display Pos.
06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.4 Resolution codes 10.2.4 Resolution codes The following Table shows the codes for the various types of resolution. Alarm 4 ("Illegal input system") is issued when illegal values are entered as machine data. NC MD 5002, bit 4 is used to identify the units system. Metric input system G71 (bit 4 = 0) is the reset state.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations 03.95 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations Permissible resolution combinations Input resolution, display resolution and position control resolution can be defined in any combination within certain limits (see the following two tables). Please note that a factor of max. 200 between input resolution and position control resolution for all axes together is possible.
03.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations Valid combinations of position control resolution and input resolution Input resolution Unit system Position control resolution inch mm 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 mm 0.5 x 10-1 [degr.] xy - - - - - - - - - mm 0.5 x 10-2 [mm][degr.] - xy - - - - - x - - mm 0.5 x 10-3 [mm][degr.] - - xy - - - - - x - mm 2 x 10-4 [mm] - - xy xy - - - - - x mm 0.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.6 The influence of resolution on velocity 03.95 Input resolution Smallest programmable path velocity 10-2 mm, degrees 0.1 mm/min, degrees/min 10-3 mm, degrees 0.01 mm/min, degrees/min 10-4 mm, degrees 0.001 mm/min, degrees/min 10-5 mm, degrees 0.0001 mm/min, degrees/min 10-3 inch, degrees 0.01 inch/min, degrees/min 10-4 inch, degrees 0.001 inch/min, degrees/min 10-5 inch, degrees 0.0001 inch/min, degrees/min 10-6 inch, degrees 0.
06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.6 The influence of resolution on speed The maximum path velocity (defined with the input resolution) and the maximum axis velocity together define the maximum velocities. The interpolator breaks down the path velocity into its axis specific velocity components (axis velocities). Then these values are converted to position control resolution.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.8 Maximum traversing range 06.93 10.2.8 Maximum traversing range The set combination of input resolution and axis-specific position control resolution determines the maximum traversing range (separate for each axis). This maximum traversing range applies to the maximum path between the two axis limitations as well as to the maximum programmable value for axis positions, interpolation parameters, chamfer, radius etc.
06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.8 Maximum traversing range Input resolution Unit system Position control resolution 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 [mm] [degrees] [mm] [degrees] [mm] [degrees] [mm] [degrees] inches 0.5*10-1 [degrees] ---- ---- ---- ---- inches 0.5*10-2 [degrees] ---- ---- ---- ---- inches 0.5*10-3 [inches] [degrees] ±99999.99 mm ±3937.007 inches -- ±99999.999 mm ±3937.0078 inches -- ---- ---- inches 0.5*10-4 [inches] [degrees] ±9999.99 mm ±393.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations 04.96 Input resolution Unit system Position control resolution 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 [mm] [degrees] [mm] [degrees] [mm] [degrees] [mm] [degrees] mm 0.5*10-1 [degrees] --±999999.9 degrees --±999999.9 degrees ---- ---- mm 0.5*10-2 [mm] [degrees] ±99999.99 mm ±3937.007 inches ±999999.99 degrees ±99999.99 mm ±3937.007 inches ±999999.99 degrees ±99999.99 mm ±3937.007 inches ±99999.99 degrees ---- mm 0.
06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.9 Influence on the display 10.2.9 Influence on the display The axis position is displayed with the relevant axis-specific number of decimal places. No distinction is made between linear and rotary axes when defining the number of decimal places. The values for zero offset, working area limitation and scale are displayed in the input resolution.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.10 Influence on the modes/function 11.92 ”DRF” function In "DRF" mode, the handwheel pulses are also weighted with the display resolution of the selected axis. If the input resolution is greater than the display resolution (e.g. input resolution 10-2 mm, position control resolution 0.5 · 10-3), no DRF is possible.
11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.10 Influence on the modes/function Maximum pitch for threads The maximum pitch that can be defined for threads depends on the IPO time and the input resolution. The table shows the maximum product that can be defined for spindle speed · pitch: IPO [ms] 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Maximum product 10 **-3 120000 100000 85000 75000 65000 55000 52000 © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 840C (IA) with IR ...
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.3 BERO (SW 4 and higher) 10.3 10.94 BERO (SW 4 and higher) The zero mark can be synchronized to a BERO switch with SW 4 by means of a PCA measuring circuit or with SW 3 by means of actual value acquisition via 611D-PCU.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4 Axis installation 10.4 Axis installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 11.92 Bit 2 of NC MD 564* = 0 Move feed axis mechanically in pos. direction Is actual value display on NC monitor being incremented? No Bit 2 of NC MD 564* = 1 Yes 10 mm mech. movement = 10 mm actual value display on NC monitor? No Check (NC MD 364*, 368* and 1800*) Yes Pos. polarity of set speed voltage when axes move in pos.
09.95 10.4.1.2 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Speed setpoint matching / tacho compensation NC MD 256* Scaling factor maximum velocity [mm/min] [inches/min] [degrees/min] NC MD 260* Scaling factor maximum speed setpoint [mV] (up to SW 2) [0.01 % of max. setpoint speed] (as from SW 3) The quotient of MD 256* and MD 260* is used to match the controlled system to the servo gain factor defined in MD 252*.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 09.95 Example (for analog): ”Vmax” = 300 mm/min ”Umax” = 9000 mV MD 256* = 3000 or 6000 with SW 3 MD 260* = 90000 or 18000 with SW 3 Example of a linear axis for analog Input/display resolution IS = 10-4 inch Position control resolution MS = 0.5 · 10-3 mm Rated motor speed or FDD MD 1400 n = 3000 rev/min Spindle pitch s = 10 mm/rev Gear (spindle motor) r = 1 : 2 = 0.5 Required max. setpoint U = 9.5 V Max.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a aaa a a a a aaa aaa a aa aa a a a a aa aa a a aa aaa aaa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Enter the servo gain according to the following conversion formula in NC MD 252*: 5000 KV (0.01 s-1) = 3 m/min · KV · KV mm m/min = 1666 mm The numerical value 1666 is thus input for the KV factor 1. To evaluate the starting conditions and determine whether the set maximum value has been selected correctly, use the dynamically most unfavourable axis that contributes to continuous path control.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 12.93 Overshooting may also have one of the following causes: • • • • • • Acceleration too great (current threshold is reached) Excessive rise time of speed circuit Fault in speed controller (re-optimization may be necessary) Mechanical backlash Displaced location of mechanical components Load fluctuations (vertical axis) For safety reasons, select a Kv factor that is at least 10 % lower than the maximum possible factor.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Checking/determining the acceleration values Setting: NC MD 276* Criterion: Overshoot-free acceleration or positioning at rapid traverse rate (acceleration stop limit). Under maximum load conditions (heavy workpieces on the machine table) Measuring equipment: Recorders, storage oscilloscopes or trace function (Section 9) Measuring point: Setpoint speed and possibly actual current and speed controller output.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.5 09.01 Jerk limitation (as from SW 6) Definition of term: By jerk we mean the change in acceleration per unit of time. Previous behavior (up to SW 5) In the velocity control function used until now, the acceleration changes over time in steps.
09.01 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Example: 50 m/s3 4 m/s2 24 m/min 10 ms Maximum jerk (r): Maximum acceleration (a): Programmed velocity (v) Interpolation cycle (TIPO): A jerk of 50 m/s3 results in a change in acceleration per IPO cycle of 0.5 ms/2. This is calculated as follows: r=50 50 m m m = = 0.5 2 /TIPO s3 100·TIPO·s2 s With jerk limitation the maximum acceleration of 4 m/s2 is not reached until 8 IPO cycles have elapsed.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.6 06.93 Position monitoring Coarse exact stop and fine exact stop tolerance ranges (NC MD 204* and 208*) The approached position is checked. In automatic mode, the next block is not started if the following error exceeds the value entered in NC MD 204* to 208*. Setting The positioning accuracy depends on the quality of the position control and speed control loops.
06.93 10.4.1.7 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Dynamic contour monitoring Operational faults resulting from the mechanical jamming of axes or drive faults can be detected with the help of dynamic contour monitoring and an incorrect parameterization of the machine data setting for drift and multgain rectified. The contour monitoring works by continuously comparing the measured following error and the following error calculated from the NC position partial setpoint.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 09.95 In addition to the values set in machine data NC MD 252* (servo gain) and NC MD 260*, 1200* (multgain), the servo gain is also influenced by the tachogenerator compensation in the speed controller (for analog), by the variable increment weighting and by gear ratios etc. NC MD 332*, MD 256* and 336* are used to influence the contour monitoring.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.3 Axis traversing 10.4.3 Axis traversing 10.4.3.1 Traversing in jog mode Prerequisites • • • • • All axis setpoint cables inserted. Control direction correct. Position control loops closed. All gain values correct. Safety signals active (EMERGENCY STOP, HARDWARE LIMIT SWITCH).
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.3 Axis traversing 06.93 In the absence of feed enable and servo enable signals, an indication showing that the axis is not in position (" > ") is screened when the direction key is pressed.
09.95 10.4.4 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach Reference point approach Corresponding data • • • • • • • • • MD 240* (reference point value) MD 244* (reference point offset) MD 284* (reference point cutoff speed) MD 296* (reference point approach speed) MD 5008 bit 5 (setting up in jogging mode) MD 560* bit 6 (reference point approach with automatic direction recognition) MD 564* bit 0 (direction of reference point approach) "Ref.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 11.92 1st case: Axis is ahead of the reference point cam Speed 2000 units MD 296* MD 284* 0 1 2 3 Reference point cam 4 Path Reference point Reference point pulse Axis is ahead of reference point cam 0 When the direction key is pressed, the reference point for the axis is approached in the specified direction (MD 564* bit 0) at the speed defined in MD 296*.
11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 2nd case: Axis is at the reference point cam Rather than accelerate to the reference speed, the axis accelerates immediately to the reference point cutoff speed (MD 284*).
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 10.4.4.2 12.93 Reference point approach with automatic direction recognition Prerequisites • • • • MD 560* Bit 6 = 1 Feed enables set Reference point cam extends as far as the traversing limit Reference point is ahead of reference point cam The purpose of automatic direction recognition is to eliminate the problems caused by reference point approach without automatic direction recognition in situations such as those presented in case 3.
07.97 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 01.99 Remarks: LF) • Only one axis per NC block can be programmed (e.g. G74 • From SW 5 up to 5 axes can be programmed in one NC block. • TRANSMIT or coupled motion must not be selected • G74 is non modal • Tool offset and zero offset, PRESET + DRF are suppressed internally with G74 and automatically become active again after ”Reference point reached”. This also applies to G functions such as e.g. G01, G90, G94 etc.
07.97 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach This function is started by • G74 from the part program (with internal triggering of G200 for this axis at the end of referencing) or • pressing of the direction key enabled for referencing by the user in the reference point approach mode. The block-stepping conditions with G74 are the same as with conventional referencing.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 07.97 MD 1824* bit 5 enables this function. By means of MD 1824* bit 3 the user can define whether only the "Reference point reached" signal is set with "Set reference dimension" or whether the absolute system is also set to the value specified in MD 240*. MD 1824* bit 3 is active only with the "Set reference dimension" function and has no effect on normal reference point approach (default: setting of absolute system MD 240* active).
11.92 10.4.5 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 11.92 The following control loops must be used for processing distance coded reference marks: • SPC control loop. Measuring systems with rectangular and sinusoidal output signals (currents) can be connected to a SPC. Where measuring systems have sinusoidal output signals, EXE submodules must be inserted into the module. • HMS control loop. As standard, this board is only used for encoders producing unconditioned voltage signals.
11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 10.4.5.1 Initial installation of distance-coded reference marks The following steps must be followed when installing the distance coded reference marks for the first time: 1. Selecting the measuring system MD 1808*, bit 4, must be set for distance coded reference point approach. 2.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 11.92 3. Direction of linear scale as compared with the machine system It should be made clear how the linear scale is applied to the machine system. Whether the direction is positive or negative is defined in MD 1808*. • NC MD 1808*, bit 2 = 0 Linear scale same direction as machine system • NC MD 1808*, bit 2 = 1 Linear scale opposite direction to machine system 4.
11.92 n= 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 3040 mm 1000 . 0.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 09.95 The absolute offset is the offset between machine zero and the 1st reference mark on the linear scale; at any one point (any axis position) the absolute offset corresponds to the difference between the position to be measured in the machine system (e.g. measured with a laser interferometer) and the current position on the linear scale (1st actual value display when MD 396* = 0).
08.96 10.5 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions Spindle installation, spindle functions Corresponding data • • • • • • • • MD 131 ... 146 (Spindle override) MD 4000 ... 499* (Spindle data) MD 540* bit 2 MD 5200 bits 0 ... 7 MD 524* bits 0 ... 3 MD 521* bit 1 and bit 7 Interface DB 31 (Spindle DB) Interface DB 10 ... 13 (Channel DB) Note: Additional information in Functional Descriptions Section.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions 09.95 General notes: • With a spindle speed of 0.1, the feed actual value indication in the basic display with functions G95/G96 is too low by a factor of 10. • If the system includes several spindles, a function must always be assigned to the first spindle. The diagram "Structure of spindle control" provides an overview of the functions available and also the flow of data and commands.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions Description of the spindle modes The following is a description of the various modes in which the spindle may be operated. The individual modes can be programmed by NC (part program MDA, overstore), PLC or command channel (CC). The functions that are then available are given in each case. The various command sources (NC, PLC or CC) have different priorities, i.e. they can interrupt or interlock each other.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.1 Open-loop control mode 09.95 Gear ratio changing Gear ratio changing is only possible in the open-loop control mode. There can be up to eight different ratios between motor and spindle. A permitted range of speed can be laid down for each gear ratio by defining maximum and minimum speed values.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.1 Open-loop control mode In view of the fact that not all spindle drives are equipped with ramp-function generators, a ramp-function generator was integrated in the control (unit 1 ms).
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.2 Oscillation mode 10.5.2 09.95 Oscillation mode The oscillation mode can be used with gear ratio changing to facilitate engagement of the gear by oscillating the spindle. When switching from open-loop control to oscillation control, the speed setpoint is first reduced to zero at the deceleration ramp defined by the active acceleration time constant. The oscillation speed setpoint is then output. Preconditions The request for the oscillation mode comes from the PLC.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions Accuracy • The position is entered with an accuracy of 0.01o. The positioning accuracy achieved by the spindle depends on a number of factors: – The resolution of the angle measuring system – The gain factor of the active gear ratio – The drift – The interfacing to the drive system. Restrictions • • Gear ratio changing cannot be employed in the positioning mode.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 09.95 Data required This section describes the data that is of special significance to the positioning mode. A detailed description of the machine data and setting data will be found in the Section "NC Machine Data (NC MD)/NC Setting Data (NC SD)". • Position An absolute position is given in response to a request from the NC or PLC. The position is specified by S value, machine data or setting data.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 10.5.3.2 Absolute positioning sequence (M19) The spindle is to be brought to a preset angular position as quickly as possible and stopped there. Driving to a particular position is only possible if the spindle is synchronized with the encoder, i.e. if the zero mark has been overtravelled once. It is only then that the absolute position of the spindle can be defined. 1.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 09.95 b) Spindle running The spindle is driven to the specified position as quickly as possible, without changing the direction of rotation. The nearest position at which the spindle can be stopped is calculated from the actual position and the deceleration distance based on the momentary speed. The spindle is driven to the specified position in the direction of travel.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaa 09.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 01.99 The following applies when selecting the creep speed: The drive must have sufficient acceleration reserves in the speed range below the creep speed, corresponding to the programmed acceleration for position-controlled spindle operation. The values in the preset range (100 rev/min to 500 rev/min) are generally suitable. If the spindle leaves the target position when function M19 is selected (e.g.
a a a a a a a aaa a a a aaa a aa a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 10.5.3.4 09.95 Method A and B in the NC-internal solution With the NC-internal solution there are two methods (method A and method B) by which the oriented spindle stop can be integrated into the block sequence of the NC program. Method A (M19 without axis motion): With method A, the spindle stop is handled in a separate part program block and a block change is only initiated after the function has terminated.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions • If the PLC detects the auxiliary function M19 it can prevent the block change by cancellation of the READ-IN ENABLE. • If M19 is reselected before a previous M19 has terminated with the signal "Acknowledge M19", the new spindle position is adopted by the function. The NC moves to the new position by the shortest path regardless of the set direction of rotation.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 09.95 Referring to the SIMODRIVE 650 Operating Instructions will explain the following: P-54: Scaling factor for set speeds (M19 mode) Terminal for M19: Terminal configurable with P-83 to P-85 The block diagram shows that MD 469* and the SIMODRIVE parameter P-54 must add up to 1 in order to obtain the same effective gain factor between points a and b with or without changeover.
09.95 10.5.3.6 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions Aborting the positioning mode The specified position is regarded as having been reached (or the distance as having been traversed) when the spindle is within the position window. This is signalled to the PLC by setting IS:SPINDLE POSITION REACHED. The position is held under position control until the M19 function is aborted.
Fig. 1 Speed Fig.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.4 Curved acceleration characteristic (SW 4 and higher) Figure 2 shows the speed characteristics which are obtained when the acceleration capability is fully utilized. In speed-controlled operation, the drive accelerates either according to the acceleration rate (dashed line for T2 in Fig. 2) set in MD 419* (ramp-up time constant T in open-loop control mode) or, when the ramp-up time constant is shorter, optimally in terms of time along the current limit.
10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.4 Curved acceleration characteristic (SW 4 and higher) 09.95 When speed nx is set to the same value as limit speed nmax or when "0" (default setting) is input, the acceleration characteristic is the same as that obtained with previous software versions, i.e. without characteristic curvature (break point above maximum speed). When "1" is entered for adaptation factor c, the acceleration rate is reduced according to the speed value reciprocal (1/n) above limit speed.
09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.5 PLC intervention in spindle control 10.5.5 PLC intervention in spindle control The flowchart on the next page shows the effects of the various PLC interface signals on the spindle. For the sake of clarity, the feedback pulses are not shown.
12.93 11 Data Backup/CPU Replacement 11.1 Data area 11 Data Backup/CPU Replacement 11.1 Data area The following data areas are backed up by a battery on the CSB module: NC data: • • • • • • NC machine data Cycle machine data Setting data Tool offsets Zero offset R parameters PLC machine data PLC data (RAM to PLC CPU, ...
11 Data Backup/CPU Replacement 11.1.1 Ways of backing up data 01.99 11.1.1 Ways of backing up data • BACKUP function On the MMC CPU you will find a Centronics parallel interface (X122) to which you can connect a VALITEK streamer. With a streamer you can make a backup copy of all files on the hard disk (including the operating system and user data). You cannot copy individual files with the BACKUP function. You can call the BACKUP function from within the DIAGNOSIS area1).
SINUMERIK 840C (IA) a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa a a aaa aaa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaa a Drive machine data a aaa aaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa a
11–4 DRAM Software and TEA3 FDD SRAM a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaa a Data mem.
a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaa a aaa a a a a a aaa a aaa aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a
11 Data Backup/CPU Replacement 11.1.3 Saving/loading NCK data 01.99 aaaaaa aaaaaa aaa Procedure to save all RAM data on hard disk Start Services and data management operating areas Diagnosis operating area Select the PLC/programs directory Set password, e.g.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a aaa a a a a a aa a a aa a aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa a 9) Set time and date 11) SK ”General reset mode” 11–10 a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
No a aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a aaaa a a a a aaa a a a aa aa aa a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa a Yes a aaa a aaaaa aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa
a a a a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a
01.99 11 Data Backup/CPU Replacement 11.1.8 CPU replacement 11.1.8 CPU replacement NCK CPU replacement Follow installation and startup instructions according to flow diagram ”Loading from hard disk” (Section 11.1.7). Note: PLC data need not be loaded. When replacing NCK CPU, items 8 to 14, 20 to 22 as well as 30, 31 and 37 to 63 do not apply. After completion of the installation and startup procedure, switch to ”Power on”. Note: Setting data, zero offset and tool compensation are missing.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a PLC CPU replacement 11–16 Yes a aaa a aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaa a a aaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1 Leadscrew error compensation 6FC5 150-0AH01-0AA0 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1 Leadscrew error compensation 6FC5 150-0AH01-0AA0 12.1.
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa 06.93 aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaa 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description Because compensation is not possible at the reference point, the error curve must be shifted so that the error is zero at the reference point. Pos. error Spacing Error=0 Reference point Traverse path Neg.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description 06.93 The spacing between 2 leadscrew error compensation points (MD 324*) is then specified, being based on the permissible tolerance of the final (compensated) leadscrew error curve, the actual leadscrew pitch error and the number of possible compensating values. The following method for determining the spacing between 2 leadscrew error compensation points may be used: S : l : Compensation amount, e.g.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description Spacing Pos. error Error=0 Traverse path Neg. error Reference point It is then specified how many compensating points must be supplied by means of the entered spacing between 2 leadscrew error compensation points and the end stops at the machine.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description Spacing Pos. error Traverse path Error=0 Neg. error Reference point 790 793 813 Example Axis 1 shows the error curve; no compensation points have been used as yet. Reference point value is 0 Max. - travel: - 35.000 mm Max. + travel: + 205.00 mm Tolerance band (prescribed by machine manufacturer), e.g. 0.01 mm Spacing between two leadscrew error compensation points, e.g.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description Pos. error 11.92 Spacing K3 K16 K5 K6 K20 K24 K17 Traverse path Error =0 Neg. error Reference point + ++ – – + Tolerance band e.g. 10 µm Compensated curve Compensation value e.g. 5 µm Commencing at the reference point and proceeding in a negative direction, the error curve runs to the end of the traverse path within the tolerance band. No compensation is necessary. A better result is obtained through positive compensation at K3.
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description If the reference point is assigned to compensation point 793, breakdown of the 1000 compensation points is as follows: Comp. point 1 790 813 a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a aaaaaaaaaaaa a a aaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaa 500 1000 Comp. point 793 NC MD 6198 NC MD 316* 198 The reference point determines the location of the hatched area of the compensation points used.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.2 Rotary axis function 12.2 09.95 Rotary axis function 12.2.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.2.2 Functional description with calculation, and with G68, the programmed position is always approached over the shortest path. G68 is modal and belongs to the G90/91 group. If "modulo programming" is not activated, G68 is treated like G90. If the rotary axis is not to traverse over the shortest path, it must be programmed with G90 and a sign.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.3 Endlessly rotating axis (SW 4 and higher) 12.3 08.96 Endlessly rotating axis (SW 4 and higher) 12.3.1 Corresponding data • • • • • • • NC MD 330 NC MD 5024 Bit 1 NC MD 5025 Bit 1 NC MD 5025 Bit 6 NC MD 521* Bit 2 NC MD 584* Bit 0 NC MD 1152* (dead time compensation for dwell) (G200 after G [..] 105, G [..
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.3.2 Display of endlessly rotating axis 12.3.2 Display of endlessly rotating axis The actual value display is the same as that for a rotary axis, i.e. it is dependent on existent machine data, either absolute or modulo. The axis-specific G commands can be displayed in all operating modes. A new softkey "Axisspecific G functions" is provided for this purpose. When this function is selected, the axisspecific functions are superimposed on the program pointer.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.4 Dwell in relation to axes or spindles 12.4 09.95 Dwell in relation to axes or spindles With certain technological processes (e.g. gear shaping/hobbing, etc.), a defined path (circular movement or relief cut) must be traversed when the final infeed is reached. The infeed axis must be retracted on completion of this programmed path. This function must operate with the greatest possible accuracy.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.4.2 Extension of dwell (SW 5 and higher) 12.4.2 Extension of dwell (SW 5 and higher) 12.4.2.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.5 Warm restart 12.5 11.92 Warm restart 12.5.1 Corresponding data • • • • • • • • • • NC MD 360* NC MD 316* NC MD 320* NC MD 453* NC MD 876 to 899 NC MD 5156 to 5183 NC MD 5060 to 5139 Signal DB 48 DL 0 bit 0 Signal DB 48 DR 1 bit 0 Alarm nos. 70 to 80 (Axis valid in BAG) (Pointer for leadscrew error comp.) (Pointer for leadscrew error comp.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.5.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6 Coordinate transformation 6FC5 150-0AD04-0AA0 12.6 09.95 Coordinate transformation 6FC5 150-0AD04-0AA0 Coordinate transformation TRANSMIT (implemented from software version 1 onwards) is used for face milling of turned parts (lathes). In order to implement this, a C axis and a powered milling cutter are required in addition to the X and Z axes.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.2 Functional description 12.6.2 Functional description Whereas machine movements are executed in the real machine coordinate system, programming is carried out in the ficticious (Cartesian) coordinate system. Fictitious axes must be defined especially for the fictitious coordinate system. A fictitious axis can only be traversed when transformation is selected. Fictitious axes can be selected freely with respect to their axis name and their location.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.2 Functional description 09.95 For this reason, there is a transformation-specific value "Minimum velocity for Transmit" MD 738, 748, ... . The value is entered in units [IS] / IPO cycle. Tests have shown the value 10 to be a useful default value. Because the feedrate is not reduced further after a certain distance between the contour and the centre of turning, the maximum velocity of the rotary axis can be exceeded.
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.3 The transformation data set 12.6.3.1 Definition of machine data for coordinate transformation Rotation through +Rotation through +Rotation through X Xn, Yn, Zn = rotated coordinates X, Y, Z = real coordinate system U, V, W , ,x = fictitious coordinate system = angle of rotation The angle or real machine axis through which the associated axis rotates, is always assigned to the 1st real axis (MD 5065).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.3 The transformation data set NC MD 5060 to 5069 NC MD .. 5070 to 5079 . NC MD 5130 to 5139 01.99 1st transformation data set 2nd transformation data set 8th transformation data set Conditions for a transformation data set a) b) c) d) e) All axes and the channel must be assigned to the same operating mode group. The transformation option must be available. The transformation data are taken over internally by the control at restart (warm restart).
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.4 Transformation parameters 12.6.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.4 Transformation parameters 12.93 Transformation parameters for 2D coordinate transformation Parameter 1: Parameter 2: Parameter 4: a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa a Parameter 10: X shift of the real system in direction X relative to the fictitious origin a 1 [unit: units (IS)]. Y shift of the real system in direction Y relative to the fictitious origin a 2 [unit: units (IS)].
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.4 Transformation parameters rotation through rotation through rotation through X Xn, Yn, Zn = rotated coordinates X, Y, Z U, V, W , ,x = real coordinate system = fictitious coordinate system = angle of rotation (angle from MD) Transformation parameters for transmit Parameter 9: (MD 738...) minimum speed for transmit. [Unit: units(IS)/IPO cycle] Recommended value 10 On standard machines, the fictitious system rotates through the real machine coordinate system.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.5 Machine data for fictitious axes 11.92 12.6.5 Machine data for fictitious axes MD 224* Software limit switch MD 228* Software limit switch MD 232* Software limit switch MD 236* Software limit switch The software limit switch need not be input if the fictitious working area is outside the real possible working area, as the control always restricts the fictitious software limit switch to the limit switch of the A1R axis (linear axis of transformation).
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.6 NC PLC interface signals 12.6.6 NC PLC interface signals • In the case of fictitious axes, only the signals ”JOG, rapid overlay and handwheel 1,2 and the input interface” are processed. The output interface is neglected. The signal ”Reference point reached” is permanently set to 1. • The program including the transformation is not stopped if the signal ”Axis disable” is set for a real axis in the transformation grouping.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.7 Explanation of the programming and operation of coordinate transformation 11.92 12.6.7 Explanation of the programming and operation of coordinate transformation • Fictitious axes must not be programmed in the reset position (G130, G230, G330) Alarm 2043. • A transformation may only be activated from the reset position, i.e. transition to a different transformation is only possible via a previous deselection block.
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.7 Explanation of the programming and operation of coordinate transformation • Transformation must not be selected or deselected within a contour block sequence. • Block search with calculation to a program part where transformation is active is permitted. • The automatic block search to a program part where transformation is active is not permitted. • PRESET shifts of real axes are ignored in transformation.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.8 Examples of coordinate transformation 12.6.8 11.92 Examples of coordinate transformation 12.6.8.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.8 Examples of coordinate transformation 12.6.8.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.8 Examples of coordinate transformation 11.92 12.6.8.
01.99 12.6.9 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7 Spindle functions 12.7 12.93 Spindle functions 12.7.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.1 Overview The diagram "Structure of spindle control" provides an overview of the functions available and also the flow of data and commands.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 12.7.2 11.92 Description of the spindle modes The following is a description of the various modes in which the spindle may be operated. The individual modes can be programmed by NC (part program MDA, overstore), PLC or command channel (CC). The functions that are then available are given in each case. The various command sources (NC, PLC or CC) have different priorities, i.e. they can interrupt or interlock each other.
03.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Gear ratio changing Gear ratio changing is only possible in the open-loop control mode. There can be up to eight different ratios between motor and spindle. A permitted range of speed can be laid down for each gear ratio by defining maximum and minimum speed values.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 06.93 12.7.2.2 Oscillation mode The oscillation mode can be used with gear ratio changing to facilitate engagement of the gear by oscillating the spindle. When switching from open-loop control to oscillation control, the speed setpoint is first reduced to zero at the deceleration ramp defined by the active acceleration time constant. The oscillation speed setpoint is then output.
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Selecting the positioning mode Positioning mode can be selected by NC, PLC or command channel.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 06.93 When there is a request from the NC or PLC, the corresponding machine data of the active gear ratio is used, which is: – – MD 427* to 434* MD 478* to 485* – – MD 435* to 442* MD 443* ”Creep speed for M19” as max.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaa 0° Example aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaa 11.92 Actual position: 315° Programmed position: +135° a a aaa a a a a aa a a a aaa aa a Shortest path: 90° Example for case 1a b) Spindle running The spindle is driven to the specified position as quickly as possible, without changing the direction of rotation.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 06.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaa 11.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 06.93 n Creep speed for M19 Recognition of zero mark t Speed characteristic for case 2 The following applies when selecting the creep speed: The drive must have sufficient acceleration reserves in the speed range below the creep speed, corresponding to the programmed acceleration for position-controlled spindle operation. The values in the preset range (100 rev/min to 500 rev/min) are generally suitable.
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes n Max.
a aaaaaaaa a aaaaaaa aaa aaaa aaa a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Gain factor change In the positioning mode it must be possible to drive the spindle to a target position from full speed under position feedback control. The spindle must be held at the target position even when there is drift. To ensure that the spindle is steady at rest, even in the presence of drift, very small set speeds with very high resolution must be given to the drive actuator via the analog interface.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 11.92 Referring to the SIMODRIVE 650 Operating Instructions will explain the following: P-54: Normalization factor for set speeds (M19 mode) Terminal for M19: Terminal configurable with P-83 to P-85 The block diagram shows that MD 469* and the SIMODRIVE parameter P-54 must add up to 1 in order to obtain the same effective gain factor between points a and b with or without changeover.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Aborting the positioning mode The specified position is regarded as having been reached (or the distance as having been traversed) when the spindle is within the position window. This is signalled to the PLC by setting IS:SPINDLE POSITION REACHED. The position is held under position control until the M19 function is aborted.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 10.94 At speeds (n) above rated speed (nn), the drive acceleration capability decreases in relation to the speed. Immediately above rated speed nn, there is a range of "constant power" in which the torque (and thus also the acceleration capability) drop in proportion to 1/n. When speed n increases further, there is a range ("breakdown limit") immediately above speed nk in which the torque decreases in proportion to 1/(n*n).
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes In main spindle drives, the torque is limited as follows (cf. Fig.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 10.94 When speed nx is set to the same value as limit speed nmax or when "0" (default setting) is input, the acceleration characteristic is the same as that obtained with previous software versions, i.e. without characteristic curvature (break point above maximum speed). When "1" is entered for adaptation factor c, the acceleration rate is reduced according to the speed value reciprocal (1/n) above limit speed.
09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 12.7.2.4 C axis mode General In the C axis mode the spindle is operated as a position-controlled rotary axis. As such, it can be included in the interpolation with other axes (e.g. TRANSMIT coordinate transformation). General notes: • Feed STOP is not displayed if a C axis is referenced in spindle mode with G74. • Block changes are not prevented nor are any alarms output if M19 is programmed when C-axis mode is active.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 01.99 Selection and deselection of the C axis mode Selection and deselection of the C axis mode is effected by the NC system (part program, MDA, overstore) with customer-specific M functions. The numbers of the functions are stored in the machine data (MD 260, 261). The address extension as for spindles must be used in the programming. The C axis mode can only be selected when the spindle is at rest.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Synchronizing and referencing The reference systems for the spindle and the associated C axis should always be identical. A parameterized shift of the zero mark (MD 459*) is taken into account. Both systems have the absolute position 0 at the position determined by the zero mark and the shift.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 06.93 • With rotary axes it is usually unnecessary to monitor software limit switches. If monitoring is required for a C axis, an explicit reference point approach must be performed. • The alarm "Excessive feed" is triggered if the cutoff frequency of the C axis encoder is exceeded. • Explicit referencing must be employed (e.g.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Parking axis If a C axis is assigned to a spindle via MD 461*, axis-specific interface signals (DB 32) are also evaluated. Two axis-specific signals in particular should be mentioned here that have feedback effects on spindle operation. The measuring circuit monitoring functions are switched off by setting the signal PARKING AXIS.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Example: • Spindle/C axis with double-track encoder • One motor for both modes (one setpoint output) • In this example, the actual values from the two encoder tracks show the same direction of rotation, which means that MD 564*, bit 2 and MD 520* bit 1 have to have the same setting. The values for the sign in front of the setpoints are taken from these settings.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Possible configurations for the C axis mode The machine data listed below must be entered for configuring the interfaces and for format interfacing between actual value, internal computing resolution and setpoint A more detailed description of this machine data will be found in Section 4 and the Installation Instructions.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 11.
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Relevance of machine data bits for sign inversion Setpoint/actual value for spindle + C axis The following machine data are affected: MD 564*, bit 1: "Sign inversion setpoint" MD 564*, bit 2: "Sign inversion actual value" MD 520*, bit 1: "Sign inversion actual value" MD 521*, bit 1: "Sign inversion setpoint" Whether these machine data bits have to be set or not depends on the configuration.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.8 Following error compensation for thread cutting 12.8 06.93 Following error compensation for thread cutting This function is used to correct the starting angle of the spindle by the calculated following error. This is to ensure that the same number of thread turns is cut at a high speed as at a low speed. The offset caused by the following error no longer occurs. This compensation only functions perfectly when cutting a thread with a constant lead.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.8.1 Multiple thread Example: Three-start thread (each offset by 120 degrees) G01 G92 : X50 G90 X50 A0 X100 G92 : X50 A120 G92 : A240 S200 LF M3 LF Starting point 1st thread start (0 degrees) X100 LF Starting point 2nd thread start (120 degrees) X100 LF Starting point 3rd thread start (240 degrees) LF LF 12.8.2 Thread re-cutting/setting up With this function a precut thread with a constant lead can be reloaded and then recut.
a aaa aaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a aa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a a
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.2 Description of function 12.9.2.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.2 Description of function 06.93 G98 F... Leading feedrate for a rotary axis in rev/min. The path feedrate is calculated internally on the basis of the leading feedrate of the path axes involved.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.2 Description of function Example for thread on a cylindrical workpiece: N10 N20 ... G0 C30 N30 G36 N40 C (Switch spindle to rotary axis mode) (Position rotary axis to 30 degrees, position Z = 2 mm; corresponds to thread insertion point) (Thread lead 5 mm/revolution, clockwise; feedrate of C axis 1000 rev/min) (Thread lead 5 mm/revolution, counter-clockwise, feedrate of C axis 1000 rev/min) Z2 C Z2 Z-30 K5 F1000 K-2 . .
12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.2 Description of function 10.94 The thread lead is programmed under address K (I, J). The sign in front of K shows the direction of rotation (see example above). Clockwise/counterclockwise rotation is defined in the Programming Guide in the section Coordinate systems. A lead must be assigned to the individual axes with G36 as well as with G33, G34, G35. The assignment is stored in MD 304*.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.6 Reading in G functions 12.9.6 Reading in G functions G functions G36 and G98 can be read by the user with FB69 via the PLC and with @36b from the NC program. 12.9.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.10.1 Rapid block change using FIFO function (up to SW 2 only) 12.93 The next part program blocks are temporarily stored in this FIFO memory in a prepared state (predecoded). Only when the memory is full with such preprocessed blocks is the program started or continued. The NC can now access the prepared blocks in the FIFO memory and process them in quick succession.
09.95 12.10.2 12 Functional Descriptions 12.10.2 Control of predecoding (SW 5 and higher) Control of predecoding (SW 5 and higher) 12.10.2.
aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 12.11.1.3 Synchronizing the absolute encoder with the machine absolute system After installation or after replacing the absolute encoder, the measuring system must be synchronized with the machine system in the same way as with any incremental system. The absolute encoder is set up with the following NC machine data.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 09.95 12.11.1.4 What happens on warm restart (POWER ON) When NC MD 1808* bit 0 "Axis with absolute encoder" is set, NC MD 1808* bit 3 "Absolute offset valid" is checked for the relevant bits. If both bits are set, the axis-specific interface signal "Reference point reached" is set on warm restart. 12.11.1.
11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 Comments • NC MD 1808* bit 3: – Software limit switch and leadscrew error compensation are enabled. – The leadscrew error between the reference point and the absolute position are included in the calculation. • Reference point approach with a SIPOS absolute encoder is only possible when NC MD 1808* bit 3 has been reset.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 11.92 12.11.1.7 SIPOS absolute encoder errors With SIPOS, errors can occur in the encoder as well as in the absolute submodule located on the HMS measuring circuit module. Please note that a faulty connection between the encoder and the absolute submodule can trigger nearly all the error messages because it is along this connection that communication takes place.
01.99 12.11.2 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Relevant machine data and alarms • • • • • • • • • NC-MD 1264* NC MD 1804* bit 0 NC MD 1808* bit 0 NC-MD 1808* bit 1 NC-MD 1808* bit 2 NC-MD 1808* bit 3 NC-MD 1808* bit 6 NC MD 1820* bit 2 Drive MD 1011.3 • Drive MD 1030.3 • Alarm 1040* 12.11.2.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2.2 04.96 Hardware requirements The ENDAT absolute encoder can only be used in conjunction with the new digital SIMODRIVE 611D modules ”Standard and performance”. Order No.: 6SN1118-0DM13-0AA0 2-axis version (Standard) Order No.: 6SN1118-0DG23-0AA0 1-axis version (Performance) Order No.: 6SN1118-0DH23-0AA0 2-axis version (Performance) The necessary software is available as from NC software version 5.2. 12.11.2.
09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Linear grid spacing 10 mm Lin. incremental measuring step = = Pulse multiplication 1 = 0.002384 µm * 2048 4 * 512 The position controller resolution is coarser than the linear incremental measuring step and therefore determines the positioning accuracy.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Function extension of the symmetrical traversing range for rotary axes (as from SW 6) General In the case of rotary axes with EnDat absolute encoders and up to SW 5, a position between 0 and 360 degrees or between 0 and 16 revolutions was calculated (depending on MD 1808*, bit 6). Once switched off at an axis position of -45 degrees, e.g. a position of 315 degrees was calculated after the next POWER ON.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2.5 04.96 Offset of the absolute encoder from the machine absolute system On initial installation or after replacement of the absolute encoder, the offset of the measuring system zero to the machine zero must be ascertained or set.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) It must be taken into account that all absolute values have the format± 99.999.999 input units: In order to be able to enter a larger absolute offset, bit 1 must be set in NC MD 1808*. When this bit is set, the absolute value of 99.999.999 must be deducted from the ascertained absolute offset.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2.6 07.97 Behaviour on power on) If NC MD 1808* bit 0 is set the NC MD 1808* bit 3 ”Absolute offset valid” is checked for the corresponding axes. If both bits are set, the axis-specific interface signal ”Reference point reached” is already set on power-on. 12.11.2.
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.3 Range extension with ENDAT absolute encoder (as from SW 6) Each time the absolute encoder is evaluated (Power On or deselection of parking axis), both MD 396*, absolute offset, and the rough encoder position are used to determine the actual position. The absolute offset must have been declared active (MD 1808*, bit 3=1). MD 396* is not changed internally and is used as a storage medium to make it possible to load old NC-MD files. 12.11.3.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.3 Range extension with ENDAT absolute encoder (as from SW 6) 07.97 NC MD 3944* The rough encoder position in NC-MD 3944* currently being used is stored at the following times: • • • When an NC-MD file is stored (all NC-MD) On NCK Power On When ”Parking axis” is deselected. Linear axes, encoder on motor The new maximum traversing range is derived from the set position control resolution. Other limitations other than those mentioned above are not necessary.
09.01 12.11.3.3 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) First start-up Initial state Initial state standard MD MD 1808*, bit 3=0 Absolute offset not valid MD 1808*, bit 7=0 No range extension MD 1808*, bit 0=0 No absolute encoder exists MD 3944*=0 Rough encoder position=0, no overflow MD 3940*=0 Gear denominator=0 Note: The initial state is equivalent to the standard data setting.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.3.4 01.99 Special start-up cases Start-up after a SW update The rough encoder position is not erased when the software is updated. The absolute encoder does not therefore have to be reinstalled. Foreseeable SRAM failures Foreseeable SRAM failures occur, for example, when the NC-CPU or the CSB board is replaced.
07.97 12.12 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12 Path dimension from PLC Path dimension from PLC General notes You can traverse NC axes directly from the PLC user program via the command channel. Machine control (control response, traverse response) and the displays of the NC remain unchanged. 12.12.1 Execution of the function ”Path dimension from the PLC” The function ”Path dimension from the PLC” is activated by the PLC user program via the command channel. The following are entered in DB 41, e.g.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.1 Execution of the function "Path dimension from the PLC" 12.93 Manual traverse commands (traverse keys) are ignored while the path dimension is being traversed from the PLC. If G68 is passed down the command channel, the path dimension on a rotary axis is traversed along the shortest path (< 180°). The function G68 precludes the functions G90/G91. The function G68 is active only for axes to which the partial function ”modulo programming” has been assigned. 12.12.
12.93 12.12.4 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.4 Meaning of NC MD 5008, bit 7 Meaning of NC MD 5008, bit 7 Bit 7=0: Path dimension is started in the AUT/MDA modes only in the NC stop/RESET state (read-in disable and end of block have no meaning). Bit 7=1: Path dimension is started in NC stop/RESET state or on read-in disable and end of block. Default setting: 0 The following conditions generally apply: NC MD 5008.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC 07.97 The path dimension is traversed if the disabling commands are cancelled and all required enabling commands present. The REPOS offset is updated whenever a program is interrupted in the AUTOMATIC mode and a path dimension then traversed. 12.12.5.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC If a path dimension is passed down the command channel, the NC traverses the path dimension as a fixed destination as in INC and REPOS modes. This applies whatever mode has been selected at the machine control panel.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC 12.93 Comments: • Keys/switches on the machine control panel: Direction keys, rapid traverse overlay, axis selector switch have no effect. • Feedrate override switch: The switch position 0% is always active for path dimension, irrespective of the setting of the PLC interface signal ”Feedrate not active”. • Program control: Dry run feedrate and rapid traverse override are not active.
11.92 Software limit switch (SW-L): The following effects occur: aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa • 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC SW-L The path dimension is traversed aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 1. SW-L The path dimension is not traversed and aborted aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 2. SW-L The path dimension is not traversed and aborted aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 3. SW-L 4.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.13 Indexing function from the PLC 07.97 12.
06.93 12.13.1 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.1 Division in set-up mode Division in set-up mode With this function the indexing positions are traversed incrementally in set-up modes INC and JOG. INC mode (incremental dimension) The indexing axis is traversed incrementally by one division when the traversing key ”+” or ”–” is operated. This function is independent of the position on the mode switch. Incremental dimensions INC 10, 100, 1.000, 10.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.2 Division from the PLC Preparatory function 06.93 Rotary axis G68 Linear axis Positioning to division number along shortest direction of rotation within 360° ––– Limit: 1 to number of divisions ND = Number of Divisions DRD = Division Reference Dimension 12.13.3 Explanation of indexing function terms Number of divisions: The number of divisions specifies the number of divisions (e.g. number of magazine locations) per absolute dimension.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.3 Explanation of indexing function terms Significance of number of divisions and division reference dimension ND = Number of Divisions DRD = Division Reference Dimension ND = 7 DRD = 360 degrees Input resolution : 10-3 a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaa Rotary axis: aaa a a a a a a aa a a a aa aa aa a a aaa aa a /360.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.3 Explanation of indexing function terms 06.
09.95 12.13.4 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.4 Machine data for the function ”Setup mode division related” Machine data for the function ”Setup mode division related” NC MD 1104*: Name Significance Standard value Input value limit Reference system Input resolution Active : : : : : : : Number of divisions (ND) Number of divisions per reference dimension 0 1 ...
12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.4 Machine data for the function ”Setup mode division related” 09.95 NC MD 564* bit 4: Name Significance Standard value Input value limit Active : Indexing axis : The indexing functions apply to this axis. The axis can be a rotary or linear axis. Bit 4 = 0 : Axis is not an indexing axis Bit 4 = 1 : Axis is an indexing axis : Bit 4 = 0 (for all axes) : 1 ...
06.93 12.13.5 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.5 Traversing an indexing axis to the reference point Traversing an indexing axis to the reference point If the function is used machine-specifically, the indexing axis can be traversed to an indexing-specific reference point. The distance between a zero mark and an indexing position can be defined in MD ”Reference point offset”. The indexing axis does not have to be traversed through a reference point to an indexing position.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.6 Monitoring 12.13.6 06.93 Monitoring Monitoring reacts to illegal MD input values for division: Permissible input values are: • • • Number of divisions Reference dimension linear axis Offset linear axis rotary axis : : : : 1 ... 999 1 ... 99 99 999 +/- 1 ... 99 999 999 +/- 360 degrees Otherwise alarm 1200* is triggered.
06.93 99999.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.8 PLC user interface 12.13.8 06.93 PLC user interface The parameters for the command channel can be set via two interfaces: a) User interface UI in the permenantly set data block DB 41 b) Any DB or DX set by the user in which the parameters for the function triggered in the NC are entered. The user must enter function number 2 in DB 41 for the function ”Indexing function from PLC”. 12.13.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.10 Error messages from the NC to the PLC 12.13.10 Error messages from the NC to the PLC Indexing from the PLC is via the command channel. If disturbances occur while this function is being executed, an error message is sent to the user interface. The error messages are divided into general and function-specific command channel errors. 12.
12.14.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.14.1 Feedforward control Setpoint smoothing A position overshoot may occur even when the dynamic feedforward control setting is correct. In this case, an additional PT1 element (setpoint smoothing filter) can be used to slightly flatten the position setpoint ramps or to smooth the setpoint peaks so that the position control has enough time to correct the setpoint changes.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.15 Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 (SW 2 and higher) 04.96 12.15 Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 (SW 2 and higher) 12.15.
12.93 12.15.3 • 12 Functional Descriptions 12.15.3 Measuring circuit monitoring and alarm processing Measuring circuit monitoring and alarm processing The functions pulse code monitoring and zero monitoring are either active or inactive for both measuring systems (selection made via MD 1820*, bit 1 and 6). If an error is detected in one of the two measuring systems, the associated alarm is triggered (alarm 140* ”Pulse code monitoring”, alarm 144* ”Zero mark monitoring”).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.16 Quadrant error compensation (SW 2 and higher) 04.96 12.16 Quadrant error compensation (SW 2 and higher) 12.16.
10.94 12.16.3 12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.3 Installation Installation The compensation value of the QEC essentially depends on the machine configuration. The easiest way to install QEC is to carry out a circularity test. With a circularity test, deviations from the programmed radius when a circle is described can be measured and displayed graphically, most especially at the quadrant transition points.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.3 Installation 12.16.3.1 10.94 Installation without adaptation characteristic The installation is carried out in two stages. In stage one, the QEC without adaptation (MD 1804*, bit 6 = 1) is derived. Two parameters (compensating amplitude and compensation time constant) can be altered.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.3 Installation aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaa 06.
06.93 aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa 12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.3 Installation 12.16.3.2 Installation with adaptation characteristic If the compensation is acceleration dependant, a characteristic must be determined in a second stage. The required compensation amplitudes for differend radii and velocities are determined, the effect of the compensating amplitudes checked in a circularity test and the optimum compensation amplitudes logged.
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a aaa a aa a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa a aa aa aa
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.17 Axis converter / spindle converter (SW 2 and higher) 12.17 Axis converter / spindle converter (SW 2 and higher) 12.17.1 Corresponding data • SDD 600* 602* 604* 606* 608* 610* 612* 626* 628* 630* 632* SD 540* bit 0 • MD 304* 548* 550* 552* 568* General The function axis/spindle converter implements the assignment of the axis/spindle names of a neutral part program to the axes and/or spindles defined in the machine.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.17.2 Axis converter 06.93 These setting data can be altered via @311, @312, @411, @412 @/PLC/RS 232 C (V24). The status active/inactive of the axis converter is stored in SD 540* bit 0. Conversion functions are active in AUTOMATIC, MDA and TEACH-IN modes but not with overstore.
06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.17.3 Spindle converter These setting data can be altered via @311, @312, @411, @412 @/PLC/RS 232 C (V24). The spindle converter is only active in AUTOMATIC, TEACH-IN and MDA modes but not with overstore. The AUTOMATIC basic display does not show that the spindle converter is active. 12.17.3.2 Programming 1) The conversion status (spindle converter) on/off and the spindle conversion list can be read or written via @311, 312, 411, 412.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.1 Corresponding data PLC user interface • • Data block DB29 for axes Data block DB31 for spindles 12.18.2 Brief description of GI functions The gearbox interpolation (GI) function replaces mechanical gear couplings (gears and differentials) on the basis of software functionality and single-axis drives.
aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa Leading drive 3 aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa Leading drive 4 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa Leading drive 5 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa Actual value LD
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.3 Operating principle 12.18.3 Operating principle Several gearbox interpolation groupings can be operated simultaneously in the SINUMERIK 840 C system. In principle, every real axis or spindle in the system can be defined as a following drive. Likewise, every real or simulated axis or spindle may act as a leading drive. It is also possible to program a drive to operate as the leading drive in several different GI groupings at once.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor 12.93 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor 12.18.4.1 Setpoint link When position-controlled leading drives are used, the command variable for the following drive can be derived from the part setpoints of the leading drives, thus ensuring a better response to dynamic control processes than can be achieved with an actual value link.
10.94 12.18.4.2 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor Actual value link The setpoint link described above cannot be used in some cases. This applies particularly to leading and following drives which differ greatly in terms of dynamic response or to leading drives, such as spindles which are not position-controlled.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor 10.94 For normal operating conditions, it is advisable to operate only one leading axis with K4 link; this will generally be the least well tuned axis(disturbances in measurement or closed-loop control) or the axis with the slowest dynamic response (e.g. main spindle).
• • • © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 840C (IA) T31/T32 T34 T4 T30 Input selection module (interpolation input): T2/T20 Input switching module: T11, T17/T41/T42 Input evaluation module: T18/T19, T15, T16 Interpolation module: T0, T1, T12/T13, T40/T43 Output evaluation module: T4/T30, T31/T32/T34 Input selection module (weighting input): T25/T26 Output evaluation module: T3/T33 Global IKA module: T1, T5/T6, T7-T10 Compensation limiting module: Axis-spec.
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa Leading axis 1st axis 5th axis 12–136 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
10.94 Link type 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
09.01 12.18.8 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.8 Following drive overlays Following drive overlays When the LINK ON gear link is activated, the following drive follows the movements of the leading drives according to the link factors entered. At the same time, i.e. when LINK ON is active, the following drive can be traversed with an additional overlay.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.8 Following drive overlays 10.94 The overlay path FD is calculated on the basis of the present actual positions and the specified synchronous positions; this path is then transferred to the following drive as an incremental overlay path. FD= (FDsyn - FDact) + KF1*(LD1act - LD1syn) + KF2* (LD2act - LD2syn) +....
12.93 12.18.10 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.10 Block search Block search Block search is only meaningful if executed with calculation. The GI commands are in this case executed as in normal program mode, i.e. the GI status is established as if the system were operating in normal program mode. Exception: On-the-fly synchronization is not executed (no traversal of following drive).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors 10.94 12.18.11.1 Monitoring for maximum velocity/speed and maximum acceleration The velocity/speed of the following drive is limited to a maximum velocity value (MD 280* or 403*-410*) 1). With an unfavourable constellation, the following drive may be influenced by the leading drives such that it would be forced to exceed this maximum velocity in order to maintain synchronism.
09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors The velocity warning threshold is input as a percentage value of the maximum velocity (NC MD 280* or 403*-410*) in NC MD 1448*/494*. 1) The interface signal VELOCITY/SPEED WARNING THRESHOLD REACHED is automatically reset when the following drive velocity drops below 7/8 of the warning threshold (hysteresis characteristic). The same also applies to following drive acceleration.
09.01 aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa nFA MD 1448* Warning thresh.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors 07.97 12.18.11.2 Fine/coarse synchronism In the LINK ACTIVE state, the interface signal SYNCHRONISM FINE or SYNCHRONISM COARSE indicates that the present setpoint position and setpoint velocity of the following drive is within the tolerance window specified by means of machine data.
a aaa aaa aaa a aaaaa aaa a aaa aaa aaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors 12.93 12.18.11.6 Special features relating to following axes • If a following axis cannot execute its traversing motion in the LINK ON state because certain enabling signals (controller enable, etc.) are missing, then the active leading axes and leading spindles defined in the GI grouping are also stopped. • The link is activated even if the CONTROLLER ENABLE is not set when LINK ON is selected.
a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaa a Erase configuration LINK ON total not referred to position LINK ON total not referred to position Selective LINK ON/OVER/OFF not referred to position G 402 G 400 On-the-fly synchronization G 403 Setting of link structure defaults Enabling of reconfiguration Enabling of link factor switchover
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.12 Programming 12.93 General information about programming • When a GI function is programmed, the following block is not read in until the GI request of the preceding block has been fully executed. The ultimate response of the control system to block changes can be influenced by means of machine data (NC MD 1848*/526*). • Only one G function in one G group may be programmed for each NC block.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.12 Programming • The defined gearbox configuration is maintained in the following events: – End of block – End of program – Change of operating mode – Warm start – Power off • Reconfiguration of the GI grouping can be prevented by appropriately setting NC MD 1844*/525*. • The link between a leading spindle/C-axis and a following drive can be defined in the configuration via the leading spindle name or by means of the C-axis name.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.12 Programming 10.94 • NC MD 1852*/527* can be set such that tool length compensation, zero offsets and the preset/DRF values are calculated into the synchronous position of the following drive. It is also possible to specify the reference system in which the synchronous positions must be programmed. (Only for G403, not PLC, IS) • After LINK OFF, axis synchronization for the following axis must be executed prior to absolute programming of the following axis.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.12 Programming A gearbox chain must not be closed in the active state, i.e. if a chain is defined such that a following drive at the end is also acting as the leading drive at the start of the chain, then it is strictly illegal for all links to be active at the same time. The user must take measures via the PLC, e.g. INTERLOCK LINK ON to ensure that this situation does not arise. No system monitoring function is provided.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13 10.94 Start-up Before commencing start-up of the GI grouping, you must complete the start-up procedure described in the Section headed "Start-up of axis (analog) and spindle". 12.18.13.1 Brief start-up of a GI grouping • Declare the desired following axis/spindle as a following drive by setting NC MD 1844*/ 525* bit 0. • Set the position control sampling time for the following drive and its leading drives to the same value.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13.2 Full start-up procedure Step Action Important information 1 Define position control sampling time Following drive and associated leading drives must generally have the same position control sampling times.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13 10.94 Start-up Before commencing start-up of the GI grouping, you must complete the start-up procedure described in the Section headed "Start-up of axis (analog) and spindle". 12.18.13.1 Brief start-up of a GI grouping • Declare the desired following axis/spindle as a following drive by setting NC MD 1844*/ 525* bit 0. • Set the position control sampling time for the following drive and its leading drives to the same value.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13.2 Full start-up procedure Step Action Important information 1 Define position control sampling time Following drive and associated leading drives must generally have the same position control sampling times.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.93 Set position control sampling times The position control sampling times for the following drive and associated leading drives within a GI grouping must be set to the same value. This sampling time may however vary from grouping to grouping (provided the groupings are not chained as a gearbox).
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up General optimization of axes and spindles • Axes: You must set all axes in the GI grouping according to the optimization instructions in the Start-up Guide (section headed "Drive optimization"). It is particularly important that the set servo gain factor corresponds to the actual servo gain factor occurring on the machine (check via following error in the service display).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up • 10.94 If the drives involved have varying dynamic response characteristics (and if it is not meaningful to match them by setting the same response values), then you can use a setpoint filter for the purpose of matching. You can activate the setpoint filter for axes with NC MD 1820*, bit 0; you must enter the setpoint filter time constant in NC MD 1272* or 486*. Note: Please note "Parameter set switchover" function description with SW 4 and higher.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 10.94 Optimization of the compensatory controller When it is activated, the compensatory controller basically increases the servo gain factor of the following drive. However, if the axis or spindle-specific servo gain factor of the following drive is already set to the maximum value, the following drive starts to oscillate if the compensatory controller is activated.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up The following servo gain factor settings are recommended: FD-KVDrv(NC MD252*/435*..442*) = 1 1) FD-KVCC (NC MD1420*/487*) = FD-KVmax -1 1) Please note, however, that only FD-KVDrv (NC MD252*/435*..442*) remains active in the LINK OFF state. If the following drive must contribute to the execution of a multidimensional path motion in the LINK OFF state, then FD-KVDrv can be reset to FD-KVmax from the part program in the LINK OFF state.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 10.94 While the following axis is traversing, the positional difference for synchronism (contour deviation FD) should be approximately 0, otherwise the time constant needs to be reoptimized. • Re-optimizing the time constant of the parallel model: – Change machine data "Time constant parallel model" manually until the positional difference for synchronism (see above) has been minimized.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up Effect of the input values in NC MD 1432*/495* (case distinction): 0: No controlled follow-up; immediate normal follow-up 1...15000: Controlled follow-up initially; switchover to normal follow-up on expiry of delay 15001 and higher: Controlled follow-up at all times Definition of "Controlled follow-up of following drive": The following drive attempts to following the movements executed by the leading drive.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.93 Setting the interlocks To complete the start-up procedure, you now need to set or reset the interlock or enable bits for certain GI functionalities according to the machine manufacturer's data.
09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation Selection • Before synchronous operation is selected, the CONTROLLER ENABLE signal must be present for both spindles. If this signal is not present, the reaction is as follows: – No switchover to synchronous operation takes place – No alarm is output – The block changes immediately.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation 10.94 • The same drive may not be configured as the following drive as a C-axis and a spindle in two GI groupings at the same time. • Synchronous operation is not cancelled when the operating mode is changed or after RESET. • The system limits the speed of the leading spindle to a maximum value which is determined by the link factor and the spindle limitations of the following spindle (max. motor speed, max.
01.99 • 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation Gear stage switchover and the transfer of new actual gear stages are not possible in synchronous operation. Synchronous spindle in mechanically coupled operation When a pair of synchronous spindles is operated with clamped workpiece, certain factors including • • • the rigidity of the workpiece the closing force of the chuck and the stiffness of the drive mechanical components cause backlash via the workpiece.
aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaa
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation The following interlocks are effective: • • • • Inhibition of reconfiguration (axis 1844*) Inhibition of link factor switchover (axis 1844*) Inhibition of synchronizing position switchover (axis 1844*) INTERLOCK LINK OFF (interface signal) To ensure that the links become active immediately after power on, "LINK ON after POWER ON" (axis 1844*) must be set for the currently active following axis.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation 10.94 Flowchart for PLC-controlled reference point approach Activate control Activate GI grouping 1 Selection ref.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation • Distance-coded reference mark system for each gantry axis To avoid the need to traverse large distances for reference point approach purposes, it is possible to use a measuring system with distance-coded reference marks as the sole or as the second measuring system. This measuring system is referenced after a distance of approximately 2 cm.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.15 Gearbox interpolation status data 12.18.15 10.94 Gearbox interpolation status data In the SINUMERIK 840C control system, the currently valid configuration and status data of the active and inactive GI groupings are stored in the so-called gearbox interpolation (GI) status data. A memory area is reserved for each axis and spindle because every axis/spindle could be a following axis/spindle.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples 12.18.16 Examples 12.18.16.1 Overview of application examples • • Hobbing Inclined infeed axes 12.18.16.2 Hobbing Interrelated functions in hobbing process The following diagram shows the configuration of a typical hobbing machine. The machine comprises five numerically controlled axes and a controlled main spindle.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples 12.93 The hobbing machine functions are interrelated as follows: B Z Y (LA 1) (LA 2) (LA 3) C (FA) The workpiece table axis (C) is the following axis; in this example, it is influenced by three leading drives.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples Example calculations of udz and udy.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples 12.93 Two co-ordinate systems are defined: X/Z = Simulated cartesian co-ordinate system Axes X and Z have no measuring circuit assignment. They are therefore referred to as "simulated axes". The machine axes U/Z1 are programmed in the cartesian co-ordinate system. U/Z1 = Real, non-cartesian co-ordinate system. Axes U and Z1 are assigned via hardware measuring circuits. They are referred to as "real axes".
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Result new U value Axis Name 1 X (Leading drive) 2 Y (Leading drive) 3 Z (Leading drive) 4 Z1 (Following axis) 5 U © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved SINUMERIK 840C (IA) aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples 01.99 Programming the GI groupings via the part program: GI grouping 1: 1st leading axis =X Following axis =U Setpoint position link without compensatory controller (for simulation axes, K3) Define configuration: G401 X Activate link: @631 G402 R100 K20.
09.95 12.19 12 Functional Descriptions 12.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.1 Options 09.95 Implementation of any geometry or velocity profiles SW 4 and higher with IKA Stage 2 IKA Stage 2 makes it possible to define a fully optional geometry between an input variable and the associated output variable. For this purpose, the relevant values of the output quantity are allocated to a number of interpolation points of the input quantity and stored as a table in the NC.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.2 Activation Activation of IKA Stage 2 The option IKA Stage 2 applies from SW 4 and contains the IKA option. With IKA Stage 2 it is possible not only to implement compensations but also any (non-linear) interpolations. The options for presetting the input and output quantity have been expanded in IKA Stage 2 for use with interpolation.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.3 Interlocks and monitoring 12.19.3 09.95 Interlocks and monitoring Interlocks In the case of axis-specific interlocks of IKA/TC movements, the current IKA/TC value is "frozen", it remains applied in static form.
aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.3 Interlocks and monitoring aaaa aaaa 09.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.3 Interlocks and monitoring 09.95 IKA warning limit with axis compensation When the compensatory/additional values of the output quantity are high, the machine may make unexpected movements which are only partly limited by the monitoring functions. The present output value is therefore checked against the limit set in NC MD 356* and, in the case of limit violation, an axis-specific interface signal of the PLC is set (DB 32, DR0, bit 6).
SINUMERIK 840C (IA) aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa Reference point -x © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved Reference point 6FC5197- AA50 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa -x aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa a
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC 09.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC 12.19.4.2 Functional description Temperature error compensation can be performed for every axis. The parameters for TC can only be transferred via the command channel of the PLC to the NC.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC 09.95 Data format of user DB • Length in words: Always value 7 in KF format • Axis number: Values 1 to 30 in KF format • Absolute TC value KTCabs: With sign, in units (MS), in KF format (value range ±1 073 741 823) • Coefficient tan ß: With sign, with significance 2-31 in KF format (value range -1....+1) The following table gives an example description of the data format of tan ß ß • tan ß (tan ß) · (231–1) (dec.
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaa
0° 12–192 90° C 180° 270° 360° aaaa aaaa aaaa 360° aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 270° aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 180° aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 90° aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 0° aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.2 09.95 Data structures and data assignment The functions of IKA and IKA Stage 2 are parameterized by the user via the individual data types depending on the functions that he wants. The sum of the data types can be divided into three data areas.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 09.95 2. Example for calculating compensation curves ( IKA example 1 ) Machining of a contour with IKA Y[mm]=100+160/3*COS[5/7*X[mm]]) from [X,Y]=[252,46.666] to [0,153.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 3. IKA configuration [ika1 data] : N0150 @40c K1 N0155 N0160 @40c @40c K40 K43 K2 K1 N0165 N0170 @40c @40c K20 K2 K102 K2 K2 K1 Type : Feedrate axis actual value No. : 1 [=X] - Definition of the output : N0175 N0180 @40c @40c K33 K2 K101 K3 K2 K2 Type : Feedrate axis set position No.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables N0250 @714 @40c K11 K2 5. Deactivate and retract - Deactivate IKA 2 K0 G200 Y N0255 G0 Y200 N0260 X300 N0270 @100 K300 N0281 M00 (error 1) @100 K300 N0282 M00 @100 K300 (error 2) N0283 M00 (error 3) N0285 @30c R31 K56 @100 K300 N0284 N0285 M00 (error 4) @30c R31 K56 N0300 M02 01.99 - Synchronization of actual value system - Retract Jump to end 6.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 3.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 07.97 Note: • - y=No. of the IKA configuration; max. 2 places x=Values - The data set for an IKA configuration most not be larger than 255 characters. Output of IKA curves %IKA2 Ny T5=x T6=x (up to SW 3) Ny : T5=x T6=x T55=x (SW 4 and higher) Note: y=No. of the curve; max. 2 places x=Values • Output of IKA points %IKA3 Ny T7=x T8=x : Note: y=No. of the curve point; max.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.4 Activating IKA data %IKA1 The IKA data of %IKA1 are active immediately. %IKA2 und %IKA3 Changes to %IKA2 and %IKA3 must be activated separately. Once all the IKA data have been entered in %IKA2 and %IKA3 all the compensation curves are calculated with the signal "Warm restart". When the data are loaded into the MMC on Power On, the compensation curves are calculated by the control automatically.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 09.01 12.19.5.5 Overview of valid IKA data Definition of the individual data types: Data type Significance %IKA3 - IKA comp. points %IKA2- IKA curves %IKA1 - IKA configuration 12–202 Data No. within data type Data type for @30c/40c or T para. G fct. for IKA G fct.
09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables Data type Significance %IKA1 IKA configuration Unit EGF EGF Unit Value x EGF IPO Data No. within data type Data type for @30c/40c or T para. G fct. for IKA G fct.
12–204 T31/T32 T34 *T18 T19 T15 T16 T4 T30 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa Input selection module (input qu
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 09.95 12.19.5.7 Meaning of the data types • %IKA1, IKA configuration Every data type can be read or written by defining the relevant type no. The control byte can be accessed byte by byte or bit by bit. In the part program. @30C/@40C are used to read and write the data. In the data file they area addressed via T parameters.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables The input quantity compensation is controlled via bit 3 of the IKA configuration. This type of compensation is only possible in SW 3! If the compensation value is too large, the compensated axis tends to oscillate. Extended IKA function Bit 4=0: Bit 4=1: Data type: 40 Format: 1 Bit IKA (limited range of functions!) IKA Stage 2 active Note: The bit is automatically set if the function is programmed via G401 or G411.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 09.95 Number of the control curve Data type: 1 The required control curve can be selected for the IKA configuration with values 1 ... 32. Input A (number) Data type: 2 Depending on the input quantity A type, this is either a global axis number or the number of a global or channel-specific R parameter. Input A (type) Data type: 20 The axis type consists of a parameter group and parameter value.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables Weighting input A, numerator Data type: 18 Input format: ±99 999 999 Weighting input A, denominator Data type: 19 Input format: ±99 999 999 By entering the numerator and denominator, it is possible to stretch and compress a compensation curve. The offset of the modulo values and the start position of the IKA configuration then refer to this value.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 04.96 IKA configuration IKA curves 5 1. Input quantity value 7 1 End pointer 6 KP Output quantity value 8 Input quantity 2 Activation byte 55 2. Output quantity 2 Curve no. aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa 6 1 Input quantity 2 Output quantity 3 . . . 32nd curve 55 aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa 34 Curve no. . . . 3. 3 7 8 KP Start pointer 5 5. 7 End pointer 6 KP 8 55 6.
09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.9 Viewing the IKA data during programming The IKA data can be viewed during programming if the following conditions are fulfilled: The IKA editor consists of list module displays used for display only, i.e. the input fields are greyed out. • • • • • The IKA data are to be found under the workpieces (LOCAL/). The display is only possible "off-line". Function "new" deactivated, i.e.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.1 Functional description 12.20.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.20 Extended stop and retract (ESR) (SW 4 and higher) – 04.96 Application of internal sources: - Emergency retraction threshold FA/FS, - 611D DC link voltage threshold, drive MD 1634, - 611D generator speed threshold, drive MD 1635 which must initiate a retraction operation.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20 Extended stop and retract (ESR) (SW 4 and higher) 3.) The possibility of initiating or reacting via mixed I/O / CSB and high-speed data channel: • • Channel/mode group-specific – Inputs for external sources – Outputs for external reactions Axis/spindle-specific – Outputs for external reactions 4.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.4 Mains buffering and mains failure detection 611A/D 10.94 12.20.4 Mains failure detection and mains buffering 12.20.4.1 Mains failure detection Mains failures can be detected by means of the infeed/regenerative feedback (I/RF) module when the 611 A/D drive system is used. By using terminal 73 on the I/RF module, it is possible to utilize the mains monitoring function of the connected actuator as an external source (e.g.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.4 Mains buffering and mains failure detection 611A/D 12.20.4.4 DC link undervoltage monitoring in 611D With the 611D package 2, the user can parameterize a new threshold for DC link voltage monitoring (drive MD 1634). The DC link voltage monitoring function via drive MD 1604, which is already available with package 1, is not relevant for the "Extended stop and retract" function since the drive reacts immediately with cancellation of SIMODRIVE_READY and DRIVE_READY.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit 10.94 12.20.5 DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit 12.20.5.1 DC link buffering aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa An axis/spindle can buffer the DC link by means of generator-mode braking.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit setpoint zero), energy is fed back to the DC link. This drive measures the DC link voltage cyclically. If the voltage increases above the values set in drive MD 1631 and 1632, the twoposition controller is deactivated, i.e. the instantaneous actual speed value is input as the speed setpoint. During active generator operation, the ZK2 message "DC link generator active" (ZWK_GEN_ACTIVE) is output.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.6 Stopping 12.20.6.1 09.95 Stopping as open-loop control function aaaa aaaa The time characteristics of this reaction type are shown in the diagram.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.6 Stopping Existing GI and IKA link branches with simulated leading axes/input quantities are not cancelled until T2 has expired. Continued traversal as an interpolative process is desirable to suppress the brief synchronism deviation (break in speed curve) which occurs on transition to braking mode. It is particularly important to eliminate this effect during finishing cut processes.
• • • • • • 12–222 NC MD 530* 596* 1 MD byte for enabling per channel NC MD 529* 592* Axis/spindlespecific interface Retraction signal DB 29 - DB 31 1 MD byte for enabling per channel NC MD 918* 1 MD byte for enabling per axis/spindle and channel 0: Reaction is not initiated 1: Reaction is initiated e.g.: Mode group stop e.g.: Alarm e.g.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.7 Retraction The following individual sources are also available: • Axis/spindle-specific sources: - Retraction threshold FA/FS exceeded DC link voltage warning threshold Generator minimum speed limit Activation of sources: The user determines which of the possible axis sources initiate a retraction and which do not in an axis-specific and spindle-specific MD byte NC MD 530* 596*.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.7 Retraction 12.20.7.1 04.96 Retraction as open-loop control function The reaction to detected retraction events can be parameterized: • • • • Switching of outputs on mixed I/O module Traversal of an internal retraction with the axes programmed for this purpose Output of a mode group stop alarm Output of PLC NS signals. The following diagram shows the sequence of retraction motions.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.7 Retraction 12.20.7.2 10.94 Retraction as autonomous drive function (611D) On SW 4 and higher, axes with digital 611D drive systems can perform a retraction autonomously if the control fails (sign of life detection) or if the DC link voltage drops below a warning threshold. The retraction motion is performed by the 611D autonomously. The retraction path and the velocity can be set in the part program.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 12.20.8.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 09.95 Example: C UZk Umin = = = 6000 µF (see table 16 kW infeed/regenerative feedback module) - 20% 550 Volt (P1634) 350 Volt (assumed) E = 1/2 * 4800 µF * ((550 V)2 - (350 V)2) = 432 Ws This energy is available at load for a time of: tmin = E/Pmax * = = = backup time in milliseconds [ms] power in kilowatts [kW] degree of efficiency of the drive unit = 0.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction Option for programmable emergency retraction The function is triggered via parameterizable sources. The response can be drive-autonomous or open-loop controlled. The possible responses are: • • • Stopping (time-controlled continuation and braking of the axis/spindles relevant to the contour) Retraction (cancellation of the positive connection) Inversion of fast process outputs (e.g.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 09.95 Drive-autonomous stopping and retraction Drive-autonomous stopping and retraction initiated by the NC must be used if a response as a function of the control (i.e. interpolation) is no longer possible, for example, if a very fast response is necessary. In this case the drive system responds within one IPO cycle by outputting a setpoint for the configured axes/spindles.
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 12.20.8.2 Activating autonomous drive emergency retraction in case of PLC failure or 5 V undervoltage (as from SW 6.3) No NCK failure, activation only when in operative mode, no run up in the general reset mode Activating Clearing for activation of the autonomous drive emergency retraction is implemented according to the function via the following MD bits: NC MD 5022 Bit No.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.21 Simultaneous axes 09.95 12.21 Simultaneous axes 12.21.1 Corresponding data • • • NC MD 5004 bit 0,1 SD 564* DB32 DWk+1 bit 0,1 1st or 2nd handwheel connected Handwheel pulse evaluation 1st or 2nd handwheel active for the relevant axis General Simultaneous axes are axes which can be traversed at a separately programmed velocity independently of other axes.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.22.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.22.2 Functional description 12.93 Cam values All cam values are contained in the setting data 7000 to 7007. This range is referred to as the cam value block and includes the positions of eight cams which are divided into four cam pairs.
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.22.2 Functional description 07.97 A A ACTIVATE CAM/AXIS ASSIGNMENT DB48 DR0.6 1 0 CAM/AXIS ASSIGNMENT ACTIVATED = DB48 DR1.6 S S 1 0 A -> as a function of PLC program S -> as a function of system Notes: • • • • A cam pair can be only ever be assigned to one NC axis at a time. Several pairs of cams can be activated for one axis. Cam signals are not output until the axes have been referenced. Cams must not be activated until axes have been referenced.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.23 Actual-value system for workpiece 12.93 12.23 Actual-value system for workpiece 12.23.1 Corresponding data • • • • • SD 5001 bit 0 NC MD 5153 bit1 NC MD 140* NC MD 142* NC MD 548*, 550*, 552* (Actual-value system for workpiece) (Reset position 6th G group) (Basic setting 6th G group) (Basic setting of tool offset block) (Address name) The "Actual-value system for workpiece" function is a grinding function; it can, however, also be used for other technologies.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.23.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.23.3 Functional description 12.93 • At the end of a program (or after reset), the last active ZO group (G54 - G57) and TO (D0 - D819) are retained. The actual-value display is merely adjusted by the programmable offsets (G58 and G59). • When the function is deactivated (SD 5001, bit 0 = 0), all actual values displays are updated according to actual-value representation for the machine. 12.23.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.2 Functional description 12.93 The operating principle is explained below on the basis of an example (showing sleeve being pressed onto workpiece). Actual position after "Travel to fixed stop" Progr. end position "Start travel to fixed stop" position Start position Selection The axis traverses at the programmed velocity towards to the programmed position, commencing at the start position. The axis behaves like a normal NC axis during this process.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.2 Functional description Deselection The NC detects that the function has been deselected through the programming of G220. In this case, the interface signals "Travel to fixed stop active" and "Fixed stop reached" are reset. The axis switches to position control. If a traversing motion is programmed in the deselection block, it must be noted that the end position of the axis deviates slightly from the programmed position.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.4 Travel to fixed stop with fixed clamping torque (torque limitation via terminal 96) 12.24.4.1 12.93 SIMODRIVE 611A In this system, a fixed current limitation is specified via a resistor circuit (or via R12) in the drive actuator. This current limit is then addressed by the control via a PLC output (which acts on terminal 96 of the actuator) as soon as the function is activated. It can thus be ensured that a fixed clamping torque is available at the axis.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.4 Travel to fixed stop with fixed clamping torque (torque limitation via terminal 96) The NC setpoint interface then outputs a voltage value according to the setting in NC MD 1144* Switchover current setpoint; however, the current limitation in the actuator becomes operative as a result of the activation of terminal 96. The NC outputs the interface signal FIXED STOP REACHED to the PLC.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.4 Travel to fixed stop with fixed clamping torque (torque limitation via terminal 96) 12.93 Functional sequence The control must switch the spindle to C-axis operation before the function is selected. It does this by activating terminal E1 (C-axis operation) of the drive actuator.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.5 Travel to fixed stop with programmable clamping torque Hardware connections: NC Speed setpoint Speed controller Current setpoint limitation Current controller aaaa aaaa M aaaa aaaa aaaa Actuator 14 24 aaa aaa aaa 56 aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaa Position actual value T P Iact PLC aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa 20 22 Changeover sp./curr.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.5 Travel to fixed stop with programmable clamping torque 12.24.5.2 12.93 SIMODRIVE 611A MSD or SIMODRIVE 660 With these systems, the drive is switched over from torque-limited operation to torquecontrolled operation after the fixed stop is reached. In this way, a torque of any desired value (0.1 to 99.9% of max. torque) can be specified via the setpoint interface. Setpoints must be input via terminals 56/14.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.5 Travel to fixed stop with programmable clamping torque The NC setpoint interface then begins to output the current setpoint defined in NC MD 1144*. The NC outputs the interface signal FIXED STOP REACHED to the PLC. The PLC then activates terminal E5 of the actuator, thus effecting a switchover from speedcontrolled to torque-controlled operation. After a time period of > 80 ms, the PLC switches off the torque limitation (by selecting the preceding gear stage).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection/deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.93 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection/deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.
12.93 12.24.7.2 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection/deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.3 12.
12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection/deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.4 Meaning of signals 1. G220 Deselection block for travel to fixed stop 1. G221 Selection block for travel to fixed stop 2. NFAFAKT Interface signal "Travel to fixed stop" active 3. PLCOUT 96 PLC output which is connected to term. 96 (611 FD) or gear stage changeover (611 MSD, 660). The MSD have 1-3 terminals available for gear stage changeover. 4.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection/deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.5 12.93 Travel to fixed stop with digital drives (SIMODRIVE 611D MSD/FDD) The functional sequence for digital drives is basically the same as that for analog drives. However, digital drives do not have external terminal wiring or any resistor circuitry in the drive. The handling of PLC signals is also simpler in digital drive systems.
aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.25 Flexible memory configuration (SW 4 and higher) 12.25 Flexible memory configuration (SW 4 and higher) 12.25.1 Corresponding data 04.
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.1 Corresponding data With the new functionality of the flexible memory configuration, the user is now in a position to configure the memory such that it is ideally suited to the field of application of his machine tool; this functionality is available for every HW variant of the NC-CPU.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.3 Functional description 12.25.3 04.96 Functional description Assignment of data to memory areas The data are stored partly in the static RAM and partly in the dynamic RAM.
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up DRAM: 704 KB 64 KB 256 KB approx.
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up The set configuration is activated through selection of softkey "Reconfig. memory". The activation command is rejected if • the NC is not in general reset mode. In this case, the dialog box "Only possible in reset" appears which is acknowledged with "ok". The user can switch to general reset mode and select softkey "Reconfig. memory" again (the set data are not lost when the user switches to general reset mode).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up • 07.97 If a module with 486 CPU is installed and digital drives are connected, the MD mentioned above must be set to "1". Loading the drive software as from SW 6 General notes: Up to SW 5 the drive software (MSD and FDD) is loaded from the MMC hard disk into the NCK user memory in its entirety while the control powers up and is then transferred to the drive when the drive powers up.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up Loading the UMS Now that the "Flexible memory configuration" function has been introduced, the user can prevent loading of the UMS by setting NC-MD 60000 in file NCMEMCFG to zero. With previous SW versions, the UMS analysis is initiated after UMS loading; this analysis function outputs alarm 91 "ID number in UMS header incorrect" if it detects an error in the UMS.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up 08.96 However, the block buffer number may be set to zero only for those channels which will never be activated for the machine tool in question. It is not possible for the NC-SW to perform a check during power-up of the number of defined channels or of the number of block buffers defined in these channels by the user since a valid MD block may not be available at the time the test is carried out.
04.96 • 12 Functional Descriptions 12.26 BERO interface (SW 4 and higher) For switched-off channels, the interactive message "No memory available for function" is output for the number of "Extended overstore". Selection from PLC is rejected with the error number 144. 12.26 BERO interface (SW 4 and higher) BERO encoders can now be connected to the 611D and to the PCA measuring circuit. The user can select in machine data which signal is to act as the trigger for zero mark synchronization.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.27 Parameter set switchover aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa Parameter set switchover aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 12.27 10.94 The Parameter set switchover function is as option (SW 4 and higher).
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.1 Parameter set switchover (up to SW 3) Spindle parameter sets (NCK/SERVO) 8 parameter sets have been provided to date for spindles. A mechanical gear stage is generally linked to these parameter sets, but is not a mandatory requirement. Gear-stage-depend.
04.96 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) The parameters to be switched over are divided into 3 parameter groups (PaGr) in the control. The individual parameter groups are switched over independently of one another. Each parameter group contains 8 identically formatted parameter sets (PaSe).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) 07.97 "Position control" parameter group The structure of the "Position control" parameter group is identical for axes and spindles. This parameter group contains the parameters "Servo gain (Kv) factor", "Feedforward control factor" and "Time constant symmetrizing filter" which were previously switched over for axes by means of thread functions.
09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) Spindle "Position controller" group 1stPaSe 2ndPaSe 3rdPaSe 4thPaSe 5thPaSe 6thPaSe 7thPaSe 8thPaSe Parameter MD Servo gain (Kv) factor 435* 436* 437* 438* 439* 440* 441* 442* Speed feedfor. contr. factor 465* 2442* 2443* 2444* 2445* 2446* 2447* 2448* D comp. feedfor. ctrl factor 2449* 2450* 2451* 2452* 2453* 2454* 2455* 2456* Time const. symm.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) "Ratio" 10.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) • The function is disabled for measuring systems with distance-coded zero marks, i.e. a gear ratio other than 1:1 must not be set for such axes. Incorrect MD settings generate the alarm "Parameterization error NC-MD" and service alarm 312. • In the case of axes, the gear ratio acts on the actual values from the 1st measuring system.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.3 Switchover 10.94 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa In addition to variable increment evaluation, a gear ratio can be activated additionally via parameters "Number of teeth, motor" and "Number of teeth, spindle". This is necessary when gear ratios change as a result of gear changes (with indirect actual value sensing).
10.94 12.27.4 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.4 Diagnosis Diagnosis The currently effective parameter sets in the various parameter groups are displayed in the NC service display for axes/spindles in the individual displays. Structure of service displays: Service Axes Individual display Axis: Following error Absolute actual value Absolute setpoint Abs.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.5 Operator inputs 12.27.5 10.94 Operator inputs The operator inputs the machine data for the parameter sets under DIAGNOSIS/STARTUP/MACHINE DATA/NCK-MACHINE DATA/AXIS or SPINDLE where the new MD are arranged under the existing parameter set data. 12.27.6 Power ON, system start, power OFF, restart During control power-up, the values from the 1st parameter set remain active until the PLC interface has been supplied with valid values.
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.2 Functional description 07.97 • It is possible to define in the PLC user program which data are to be transferred via a maximum of 32 high-speed data channels. • The minimum updating rate of these high-speed channels is identical to the set interpolation cycle (in NC), but can be set to a high multiple of the interpolation cycle for each individual channel in order to minimize unnecessary operating time loading of the NC.
10.94 12.28.3 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.3 Configuration Configuration In order to avoid complicated programming involving pointers and lengthy run times in the PLC user program, the configuring channel and data transfer areas are stored in different data blocks: A "Configuring DB" with 32 DW (DB2) and "High-speed data channels" with 256 (DB 3) are set up in the link RAM; these blocks act as the communications link between the NC and PLC.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks 12.28.4 10.94 Format of interface data blocks DB 2 configuring DB 15 14 13 12 Byte No. DL 0 11 10 9 8 3 2 1 0 Bit No. 7 6 with acknowldg. Read/ write 5 4 Operating mode STROBE DR 0 E, r r o r c o d e f r o m N C DL 1 Job No. from PLC DR 1 No.
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks DL 0 bit 8 "Strobe": Strobe for activation of configuring channel. Set by PLC user and reset by NCK after acceptance (or rejection with error code) of configuration. DL 0 bit 14 "Read/write": Definition of transmission direction: 0 = PLC reads, 1 = PLC writes.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks 07.97 DB 3 data transfer areas DB 3 data transfer areas 15 14 13 12 Byte No. DR 0 DL 1 DR 1 DL 2 DR 2 DL 3 DR 3 10 9 8 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks Activation bits (PLC NC): Each of the 32 bits represents a data transfer area, bit 0 = data transfer area 1. Data transfer areas which have already been configured can be activated (bit x = 1) or deactivated (bit x = 0) with this signal. The activation signals are evaluated in every IPO cycle by the NC. Any attempt to activate incorrectly configured areas is ignored without comment by the NC.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.5 Configuration of a high-speed data channel 12.28.5 07.97 Configuration of a high-speed data channel Step 1: Reset activation signal in DB 3. Step 2: Divide up DB 3 appropriately for all data transfer areas used. Program pointers for the data transfer areas accordingly.
10.94 12.28.7 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.7 Use of a high-speed data channel Use of a high-speed data channel Case 1: Write with acknowledgement, configure high-speed data channel, cyclical from now on: If "New value for NC data write" is not set, enter value to be written, set "New value for NC data write".
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) 12.28.8 07.97 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Permissible function identifiers and associated configuring parameters: Function identifier Explanation Max.
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Signal number Meaning Data format Unit Attribute 11009 Capacity utilization U (Unsigned 16 Bit) 7FFFH=100% Read 11010 Torque setpoint S (Signed 16 Bit) 4000H=100% Drive MD 1725 Read 11011 Active power S (Signed 16 Bit) 0.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Signal number Meaning Data format 1) 09.95 Unit Attribute 5 Part setpoint SL 0.01 % of max. load speed 3) Read 6 Synchronism deviation SL UMS Read 7 Angular offset (mech. coupling) SL UMS Read 8 Absolute position actual value (without modulo compensation) SL UMS Read 9 Part actual value 1st measuring system SL 0.01 % of max.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) The data to be read are selected via configuring parameter 2.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) 07.97 Explanation of NCK data (SW 5 and higher) Function identifier Explanation Max. permissible number Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 03 (SW 5 and higher) NCK data 32 0 Signal number Axis number Channel/IKA number Signal number Name of the NCK signal Axis no. Unit 1) Channel/ IKA no.
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Example: Parameterization of DB 2 for reading without acknowledgement of the signal path feedrate (signal No. = 2) in the 3rd channel is as follows: Byte no. Content Meaning DL 0 0x01 DR 0 -- DL 1 0x13 Job number of PLC DR 1 0x01 No.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) 04.96 Axial feed: Formula for servo trace: Formula for high-speed data channel: RW=MW*120000*LF/IT [mm/min] RW=MW*60000*LF/IT [mm/min] Example: G91 G94 F1000 Z10 X10 In servo trace: Read-off MW= 1885 in Z axis with LF = 0.5*10-4 [mm] in Z axis and IT = 16 [ms] results in RW = 1885*120000*(0.5*10-4)/16 [mm/min] i.e. RW = 707 [mm/min] The same feedrate results in the X axis.
04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) IKA output quantity value: Important: The IKA No. selected in the servo trace screen must be larger by 1 than the desired IKA No (applies for SW 5.1 and 5.2).
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.1 Functional description Measuring block parameter: MT = Measuring sensor input Depending on the hardware, inputs 1 or 2 can be measuring sensor inputs. Sensor input one 1 is effective on all measuring circuit hardware (detailed description in section 12.29.2, Hardware - secondary conditions for measuring). Example: MT=1 MT=2 MT=R
12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.1 Functional description 01.99 MA=No. of measured values The number of measured values indicates the number of measurements to be recorded for a complete measuring sequence.
01.99 12.29.2 12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.2 General hardware conditions for "Extended measurement" General hardware conditions for "Extended measurement" "Extended measurement" G720/1 can be programmed for every measuring circuit variant: • • • • Standard measuring circuit with SPC 6FC5 111 0BA0.-0AA0, Standard measuring circuit with PCA 6FC5 111 0BA0.-0AA0, HMS measuring circuit 6FC5 111 0BA..-0AA0 and SIMODRIVE 611D modules with indirect/direct measuring channel.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.2 General hardware conditions for "Extended measurement" 10.94 SIMODRIVE 611D: • 611D measuring circuits can evaluate both measuring probes alternatively; they can also react to the following signal edge sequences: "rising/rising", "falling/falling" or "alternately rising/falling". In this case, the minimum permissible time interval between two measured values corresponds to one position controller cycle, i.e.
10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.2 General hardware conditions for ”Extended measurement” No check is made to ascertain whether R parameters which are also required by other functions are being overwritten. Which R parameters within the available parameter range are used is left to the discretion of the user. If the programmed G720/G721 variant (probe selection, edge selection, etc.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.30 Master/slave for drives, SW 4.4 and higher, option 12.30 09.95 Master/slave for drives, SW 4.4 and higher, option The function master/slave for drives consists of the options: • • Master/slave basic package (speed setpoint coupling without torque compensation) Master/slave torque compensation control (master/slave operation) The master/slave basic package and the torque compensation control is described below.
09.95 12.30.2 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.2 Difference to synchronous spindle/GI Difference to synchronous spindle/GI Unlike the synchronous spindle or GI, master/slave operation is no substitute for a mechanical link but can only support torque distribution where a mechanical coupling exists. Master/slave operation is not advisable where there is no fixed mechanical coupling because then there can be no torque distribution over a common mechanical link.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.3 Function description 09.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.3 Function description Parameterization with the NC machine data The slave is parameterized via the NC machine data.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.4 Activating/deactivating the master/slave torque compensation control 12.30.4 09.95 Activating/deactivating the master/slave torque compensation control Master/slave operation is activated and deactivated via the PLC signals in the DB32 or DB31 of the slave in question. In this way, it is possible to achieve both power-on functionality and switchability using the PLC user program.
09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.4 Activating/deactivating the master/slave torque compensation control For the master, function generator operation is also permitted in the SERVO and in the SIMODRIVE 611D (start-up functions). Measurement of the position control loop (SERVO) is made with the speed and torque coupling active. With measurement functions in the SIMODRIVE 611D (speed and current control loop), however, only the torque compensation controller is active.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.5 Response in the event of an error 09.95 So that all axes of a master/slave grouping exit the follow-up control at the same time, they must be reset internally at the same moment. For this reason, all axes of a master/slave grouping must be defined in the same mode group. Incorrect parameterization of the master/slave torque compensation control causes the alarm 1012*/2019* "Parameterization error NC-MD" and the service number 330.
03.95 12.30.6 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.6 Effects on existing functions Effects on existing functions Master/slave operation does not cause any function restrictions in the master except for the alarm handling described in the previous section. For the slave, the following changes must be taken into account because speed/torque coupling is used instead of NC-controlled motion setpoints: • Zero-speed and contour monitoring are deactivated.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.31 Dynamic SW limit switches for following axes 08.96 12.31 Dynamic SW limit switches for following axes 12.31.1 Corresponding data • • • • • • • MD 560*, bit 1 MD 560*, bit 5 MD 3932* MD 3936* DB32 DR[K], bit 3 DB32 DR[K+1], bit 2 DB10 ... 15, DR0. bit 0 Dyn. SW limit switches for following axes Software limit switches active Deadtime compensation for dyn. SW limit switches Minimum reduction factor for dyn.
08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.31.2 Description of function The reduction range represents a safety area. As soon as the following axis is positioned in the reduction range, the path speed of the channels is reduced. Since the speed set for the following axis in the next IPO cycle is not known, the path speed of the channels must be restricted by means of the reduction range for safety reasons.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.31.2 Description of function 08.96 It is possible to define for each individual channel whether or not its path speed must be reduced by means of the PLC signal to channel "Do not reduce channel". If a following axis is positioned within the reduction range, then the appropriate interface signal: "Axis is in reduction range" is set. The PLC can transmit a message in response to the output signals.
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6) 12.32 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6) 12.32.1 General description The ”Collision monitoring” function prevents collision of moving and stationary parts of the machine. A protection zone (abbreviation SR) can be defined for a machine part requiring protection. The distance between protection zones is calculated in IPO cycles. If two protection zones come close, the axes involved are braked to zero speed.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.2 Defining a protection zone 07.97 It is also possible to define protection zones in two dimensions. Two-dimensional protection zones that must be monitored mutually, must be defined in the same plane. In the event of an error, alarm 111 ”Error in collision monitoring data” is output with the code 96=protection zones not defined in the same plane. In the 3rd coordinate, the dimension of two-dimensional protection zones is assumed to be +/infinite.
07.97 12.32.4 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.4 The motion axes of a protection zone The motion axes of a protection zone If a protection zone is to be able to follow a moving machine part, e.g. a tool slide, the real machine axes that move the machine part must assigned to the protection zone. These axes are the motion axes of the protection zone. The axes must exist and be in the same mode group.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.5 Machine coordinate systems 07.97 Offset vector 4th machine coordinate system X coordinate: MD 343 Y coordinate: MD 344 Z coordinate: MD 345 Mirroring vector 4th machine coordinate system (X, Y, Z): gen. MD 5028, 0-2 12.32.6 Adaptation of the protection zone to the active tool The size of protection zone can automatically be adapted to the active tool of an NC channel.
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.6 Adaptation of the protection zone to the active tool The axes in which the tool offset in the NC channel is calculated and that of the protection zone coordinate that is to be adapted to it are assigned to one another in the axis-specific machine data MD 3938*. Gen. machine data TO allowance: MD 300 Axis-specific machine data Coord. assignment: MD 3948* 12.32.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.8 Reduction zone of a protection zone 12.32.8 07.97 Reduction zone of a protection zone Each coordinate of a protection zone that is assigned a motion axis has a reduction zone in this coordinate. The reduction zone is the distance around the protection zone within which it is only possible to traverse with a speed proportional to the distance from the protection zone.
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.8 Reduction zone of a protection zone Calculation of the number of acceleration steps to brake from Vmax to 0 using amax: m= vmax amax mremainder= ; Integer component of the division vmax amax ; Remainder of the division Calculation of the max. braking distance m·(m–1) · amax+mremainder · amax · m 2 Sbrake_max= Axis-specific interface Axis in reduction in reduction zone: 12.32.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.10 Dead-time compensation 12.32.10 07.97 Dead-time compensation Because of the internal structure of the software, dead-time compensation must be performed for all motion axes functioning as ELG following axes. The dead time to be compensated is specified in the axis-specific machine data. Dead times: ELG following axes with setpoint coupling: ELG following axes with actual value coupling: Axis-specific machine data Dead-time compensation value: 12.32.
07.97 12.32.12 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.12 Collision alarms Collision alarms When two protection zones collide, the axis-specific alarm ”Protection zone collision plus/minus” is output for all the motion axes of the protection zones specifying the direction. After that, traversal of the motion axes in the direction of the collision is disabled until the axisspecific collision alarms have been acknowledged (retract from protection zones).
12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine 12.32.14 01.99 Example on a double-slide turning machine On the example of a double-slide turning machine, let us look at the configuration of collision monitoring with a total of five protection zones. The input resolution is: 10-3 mm The safety distance of a protection zone around the machine part is defined as 2 mm. Slide 1 is moved through axes X1 (=1st axis) and Z1 (=2nd axis).
07.97 • 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine 07.97 Protection zone data BITS Protection zone exists SR exist.: MD 38761.0 = 1 Monitoring reference OFF SR 1 - 8: MD 38801.0-7 = 00000100 SR 9 - 16: MD 38841.0-7 = 00000000 SR 17 - 20: MD 38881.0-7 = 00000000 SR 21 - 32: MD 38921.
07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine 07.97 Protection zone data BITS Protection zone exists SR exist.: MD 38764.0 = 1 Monitoring reference OFF SR 1 - 8: MD 38804.0-7 = 00001000 SR 9 - 16: MD 38844.0-7 = 00000000 SR 17 - 20: MD 38884.0-7 = 00000000 SR 21 - 32: MD 38924.0-7 = 00000000 Machine coordinate system Machine coord.
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.15 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6.3) 12.32.15 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6.3) 12.32.15.1 Additive protection zone adjustment via setting data The additive protection zone adjustment is activated by the MD 3876* bit 1 specific to protection zones.
X 12–330 aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa Y aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaa
08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33 Description of function of current and speed setpoint filters 12.33 Description of function of current and speed setpoint filters 12.33.1 Introduction Owing to the complexity of setpoint filter applications, it is not possible to describe their scope of application in general terms at this point. The following section does, however, specify the criteria for selecting and parameterizing such filters.
aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaaa aaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaa aaa Ust–d Fig.
aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa n–act Fig.
aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa a,b d,q Fig.
08.96 12.33.1.1 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.1 Introduction Fourier analysis The integrated Fourier analysis function provides you with a particularly effective tool for optimizing the speed controller. It allows you to assess the speed control settings and the mechanical properties of the machine. To reach the Fourier analysis (frequency response method), please select Startup Drive servo startup Startup function .
12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.1 Introduction 12.33.1.3 08.96 Measurement procedure In order to optimize a cascaded closed-loop control structure (current, speed, position control loops), it is necessary to start with the innermost (lowest level) control loop, i.e. the current control loop. This is set optimally by means of operator command "Calculate controller data" and need not be optimized again by the user. The speed controller is also preset by means of command Calculate controller data.
08.96 12.33.2.1 MD 1001: MD 1004: MD 1406: MD 1407: MD 1408: MD 1409: MD 1410: MD 1411: MD 1412: MD 1413: MD 1414: MD 1415: MD 1416: MD 1421: MD 1665: 12.33.2.2 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter 12.33.3 08.96 Current setpoint filter Current setpoint filters (low-pass or bandstop) are used to adapt the speed controller to the machinery to be controlled. The amplitude of the speed controller frequency response should remain at 0 dB over the entire fundamental frequency range. Note The frequency response analysis of the current controller does not include the current setpoint filters.
08.96 12.33.3.1 MD 1200: MD 1201: MD 1202: MD 1203: MD 1204: MD 1205: MD 1206: MD 1207: MD 1208: MD 1209: MD 1210: MD 1211: MD 1212: MD 1213: MD 1214: MD 1215: MD 1216: MD 1217: MD 1218: MD 1219: MD 1220: MD 1221: 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter 08.
Phase angle -180 Fig. 12-4 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 102 © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved log f [Hz] 6FC5197- AA50 -10 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 3 0 -3 aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa 10 -90 0.5 0.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter 12.33.3.3 08.96 Scope of application of bandstops as current setpoint filter Bandstop filters must be dimensioned such that resonance is kept reliably low while the filter effect on the fundamental frequency range is minimized. Filter in the case of resonance in the fundamental frequency range Resonance in the fundamental frequency range can normally be restricted by means of control parameters.
Phase angle 0 -90 -180 Fig.
Phase angle Fig.
Phase angle 0 -90 -180 Fig.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter 08.96 Example of bandstop filter application The example below explains the basic procedure for applying one or several current setpoint filters. Peaks have been measured at 900 Hz and 1200 Hz. Bandstop filters must be used to dampen both resonant frequencies. The speed controller can then be set more finely to improve the inadequate dynamic response of the drive.
08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.4 Speed-dependent current setpoint filter 12.33.4 Speed-dependent current setpoint filter A speed-dependent current setpoint filter (torque setpoint smoothing) allows the user to reduce the speed ripple at higher speeds (MSD + FDD). 12.33.4.1 Machine data MD 1245: MD 1246: Threshold speed-dependent torque setpoint smoothing Hysteresis speed-dependent torque setpoint smoothing 12.33.4.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter 12.33.5 08.96 Speed setpoint filter Speed setpoint filters are used to dampen mechanical resonant frequencies in the position control loop. Bandstops and low passes (PT2/PT1) can both be used as speed setpoint filters. The tasks of the filter are as follows: • • Adapt the position controller to machinery to be controlled (e.g. table resonance) Symmetrize different axis dynamic responses in the case of interpolating axes.
08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter Speed setpoint filter combinations Filter 2 Filter 1 MD 1501 PT1 PT1 300 PT1 PT2 200 PT1 BS 201 PT2 PT1 100 PT2 PT2 000 PT2 BS 001 BS PT1 102 BS PT2 002 BS BS 003 12.33.5.2 Bandstops and low passes as speed setpoint filter Bandstop Depending on requirements, the "Bandstop" function can be set in three configurations: • Simple bandstop. MD 1514/MD 1517 and MD 1515/MD 1518.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter 08.96 1 kvmax = 2(Ters,n + Tn,w,gl + Ttot,LR + Tabt,LR) Ters,n Tn,w,gl Ttot,LR Tabt,LR LR = = = = = Equivalent time of closed speed control loop Equivalent time of speed setpoint filter Deadtime position/speed control loop (1 x TLR) Sampling of position actual value (0.5 x TLR) Position controller Another application for the low-pass function as a speed setpoint filter is the interpolation of speed setpoint steps.
Phase angle 0 -90 -180 Fig.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.34 Actual value passive monitoring axis (as from SW 6.3) 01.99 12.34 Actual value passive monitoring axis (as from SW 6.3) 12.34.1 General Special technological demands require the actual value of a measuring circuit at the same time in several axes. This entails that a measuring circuit is read out for the second time from a passive monitoring axis. For this reason, passive monitoring axes have the same drive measuring module numbers. 12.34.
01.99 12.34.5 12 Functional Descriptions 12.34.5 Parameterization examples Parameterization examples Example 1, incremental encoder: The 2nd measuring system of the 4th and the 1st measuring system of the 3rd axis monitor the measuring circuit of the 1st measuring system of the 1st axis. 1st axis: Principal axis (monitored axis) 1st measuring system released for monitoring no absolute encoder MD 18320.3=0 MD 18320.1=1 MD 18080.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) 12.35 01.99 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) General When the 840 C control is not purposely, i.e. properly ramped down but instead just turned off, general problems can occur in the operating system. E.g. opened data files may not be closed properly leading to inventory data inconsistencies.
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) Interfaces The PLC user program has available the UPS signals in FY 22 bit 6 and bit 7. The signal ”Power failure” (FY 22 bit 6=1) in the PLC user program can cause an ”Express shutdown” on the MMC. After implementing ”Express shutdown”, the signal ”Data saved” (flag byte 22 bit 7=1) can be set in the PLC user program.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) 01.99 Example ”Express shutdown” Notes 1. A detailed description of the I codes as well as the FX73/74 is contained in the Win-OEM document. Only the I code 042F (Express shutdown) is currently implemented for the FlexOS control. The use of the FX73 and FX74 is limited to this one function. 2. Acknowledgement bytes (3x FY) The error numbers are contained in the Win-OEM document (FX73/74).
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) 01.99 Example: PLC program for the initiation of an ”Express shutdown” A DB255 User DB L T KF 10 DW 10 Package length L T KH 0201 DW 11 Sender (PLC) L T KH 0319 DW 12 Receiver (MBX) L T KH 001 DW 13 Task data structure L T KH 5F02 DW 14 Task number L T KH 2F04 DW 15 I code L T KH 0090 DW 16 Control flag BA FX73 OEM-SEND KC DB KF 255 KF 10 KF 192 DBTY DBNR DWNR QTTG . . .
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36 Inch/metric switchover function (as from SW 6.3) 12.36 Inch/metric switchover function (as from SW 6.3) 12.36.1 General Use the softkey function to switch the measuring system from inch to metric and vice versa. The function ”Inch/metric switchover” has two features: 1: Inch/metric switchover function 2: Metric/inch switchover function 12.36.2 Functional description • The conversion can be configured by the user.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.4 Inch/metric switchover function 12.36.4 01.99 Inch/metric switchover function Regarding NCK under section Parameter, Setting data there is a softkey reading ”Inch/metric switchover” which, when pressed, sends an I code to the MMC application Services which then fades in the following sub-dialog window (as a safety confirmation) if the corresponding files exist (necessary to load to the NCK).
01.99 12.36.5 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.5 Inch/metric conversion function Inch/metric conversion function When the data required for loading the switchover do not yet exist, the user must change to the MMC application MDD to initiate the conversion process. The initiation of the conversion process is described below. Select the display using the softkeys for Diagnosis, Machine data, File functions. Fig.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.5 Inch/metric conversion function 01.99 When the softkey ”Conversion start” is pressed another sub-dialog appears denoting the conversion direction. Fig.: Sub-dialog in the MDD Sequence for the softkey function ”Conversion start” on ”OK” in detail: 1. Copying the data from the source machine data block (source data objects as selected above) to the data block of the target file whereby only the data TEA1, TEA2 and TEA4 are considered.
01.99 12.36.6 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.6 Deleting the conversion data Deleting the conversion data The machine data (destination files) previously created during the conversion can be deleted with the help of the softkey ”Delete”. The selection of the objects to be deleted (inch/metric) is made with the data selector. 12.36.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.7 Error handling 01.99 The entry XXX in the log file is the name of the target file i.e. the name of the destination data block. Check of the last line for errors 12.36.8 Configurability of the conversion The user can control the conversion via the ASCII lists. There is a central configuration file (CONFIG) and a common list of descriptions file (LIST) for all groups (TEA1, TEA2, TEA4).
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.8 Configurability of the conversion Structure, syntax and the meaning of key words in the file CONFIG1) as follows: Syntax: Parameter=value Parameter [//Comment]2) Value (entry example) DESCRIPTION ”Long text name” Max. number 76 Meaning Full name of switchover function3). This text appears in the MMC dialog box for the conversion function in the MDD. REFERENCE TEA1:5002.4 The reference date helps to decide which mode is set.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.8 Configurability of the conversion 01.99 Max. number Parameter Value (entry example) VALUES X:2, Y:5 FILES X:"FILES_X", Y:"FILES_Y" File name (name of machine data block) which refers to the respective status (e.g. the METRIC file for metric etc.). A maximum of 7 characters are permitted. The reserved names such as BOOT, STANDARD STANDD_M, etc. must not be used. The line with the code word FILES is also written.
01.99 12.36.9 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.9 List of descriptions List of descriptions This file describes the conversion. The syntax used and described as follows has been kept in terms as general as possible to also allow other conversions, i.e. it is the responsibility of the user to change the file in such a way that the most different conversion algorithms can be implemented.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.9 List of descriptions 09.01 Example of a list of descriptions file LIST: // Conversion of 03.99 // first TEA1 n 5002.4-7 I=0b1101 M=0b0100 3969.0 I=1 M=0 1 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 3 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 6 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 7 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 9 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 10 M=I · 2.94 – 0.01 // now the axis-specific machine data TEA1 a 18000.4-7 I=0b1101 M=0b0100 2240 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 // now the channel-specific cycles machine data TEA4 k 5 I=M · 25.4 400 I=7.2 M=3.
01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.9 List of descriptions b) Example of a special treatment in the case of axis-specific machine data: // Conversion // // Special treatment of one axis (e.g. 2nd axis) TEA1 n // !!!TRICK 17!!! 2800 I=M · 0.3937 2801 M=I · 10 2802 I=M · 0.3937 // End of file Section ”TEA1 n” (marked as TRICK) in example b) prevents the internal loop from being executed, therefore allowing the conversion of each machine data individually.
12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.9 List of descriptions • 01.99 Power failure during conversion After restarting conversion is continued without conversion errors or alarm messages from the point where the interruption occurred. • Locking during switch-over Before initiating the conversion ensure that the control is in the reset mode and remain there during the conversion process (NC start disable, feed stop and spindle stop).
13 Index Section A Absolute encoder ENDAT SIPOS Actual value system, for workpiece Alarm processing Axis Axis traversing C axis operation Drift compensation Drive optimization Drive service displays Gantry axes Inclined infeed axes Installation Speed setpoint matching Tacho compensation Parameter set switchover Reference point approach Rotary axis Endlessly rotating Simultaneous axes Axis converter Programming Axis-specific resolutions 12.11 12.11.2 12.11.1 12.23 12.15.3 10.4.3 12.7.2.4 10.4.2 10.4.1 4.
09.95 09.01 Page Control loop Current control loop Position control loop Speed control loop Coordinate transformation Interface signals, NC-PLC Operation Programming Transformation data set Transformation parameters Curve-gearbox interpolation Block search Following drive overlays Following error Gantry axes Gearbox interpolation chain Monitors Programming Start-up Status data Synchronous spindle Variable cascading Cycles Cycles machine data Cycles machine data dialog (as from SW 3) Section 9.2.1 9.2.5 9.
09.95 09.
09.95 09.
09.95 09.
09.95 09.01 Page Section P Parameter set switchover Axes Compatibility Diagnosis Drive Operation Position control Ratio Restart Spindles Switch off Switch on Switchover System start-up Password Path dimension from PLC PC data PLC configuration, machine data dialog PLC diagnosis PLC machine data PLC machine data, machine data dialog Printing, screen hardcopies Programming Axis converter Coordinate transformation Curve-gearbox interpolation Spindle converter 12.27 12.27.1 12.27.7 12.27.4 12.27.1 12.27.
09.95 09.01 Page SIPOS Software cam Speed setpoint matching Spindle Drive service displays Leadscrew error compensation (LEC) Parameter set switchover Position-controlled Spindle converter Start-up Synchronous spindle Spindle converter Interfaces Programming Spindle functions C axis operation Open-loop control mode Oscillation mode Positioning mode Stopping Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 Section 12.11.1 12.22 10.4.1.2 4.3 12.1 12.27.1 12.9 12.17.3 10.5 12.18.14.1 12.17.3 12.17.3.3 12.17.3.2 12.7 12.7.
Siemens AG A&S MC BMS P.O. Box 31 80 D-91050 Erlangen Federal Republic of Germany Tel. +49 - 180 / 5050 - 222 [Hotline] Fax +49 - 9131 / 98 - 2176 email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de Suggestions Corrections For Publication/Manual: SINUMERIK 840C SIMODRIVE 611-D Installation Instructions Service Documentation Installation Guide From: Order No.: Edition: 6FC5197-6AA50-0BP2 09.2001 Name Company/Dept.
Overview of SINUMERIK 840C Documentation / OEM Version for Windows User/Manufacturer/ Service Documentation General Documentation SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840C 840C Brochure Catalog NC 36 User Documentation SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK Accessories ACR 20/ 805SM/840C 840C Catalog NC Z Link to SINEC L2--DP with Module -- IM328--N, Slave -- IM329--N, Master and Slave Diagnostics Guide User Documentation SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840C SINUMERIK 840C Operator’s Guide -- OEM Version Windows -- Standar
